Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

he joined the bar

  • 1 foro

    m.
    1 court (of law) (tribunal).
    2 back of the stage (Teatro).
    3 forum.
    foro de debate forum for debate
    4 legal profession.
    5 lease, leasehold.
    * * *
    1 HISTORIA forum
    2 (tribunal) law court, court of justice
    3 (abogacía) bar, legal profession
    4 TEATRO back (of the stage)
    5 (reunión) meeting
    * * *
    noun m.
    * * *
    SM
    1) (Pol, Hist, Internet) forum; (=reunión) forum, (open) meeting

    foro de discusión — (Internet) discussion forum

    2) (Jur) (=tribunal) court of justice; (=abogados) bar, legal profession

    el Foro — Esp Madrid

    3) (Teat) upstage area

    desaparecer o marcharse por el foro — (lit) to exit stage left; (fig) to do a disappearing act

    mutis
    * * *
    a) (Hist) forum
    b) (period) (organismo, reunión) forum
    c) (Teatr) backstage area

    desaparecer or irse por el foro — (fam) to sneak off

    * * *
    = forum [fora, pl.], arena.
    Ex. For example, NEMROC provides a forum for libraries in the region of Newcastle with good collections of audio-visual materials to pool their ideas.
    Ex. This shifts the responsibility for headings and their arrangement into the arena of cataloguers and indexers.
    ----
    * foro abierto = open forum.
    * foro de debate = discussion list, listserv(er) [list-serv(er)], newsgroup [news group], electronic forum, open forum, e-mail list, distribution list, electronic distribution list, discussion forum.
    * foro de debate en línea = online forum.
    * foro de discusión = newsgroup [news group], electronic forum.
    * foro de noticias = newsgroup [news group].
    * foro internacional = international forum.
    * * *
    a) (Hist) forum
    b) (period) (organismo, reunión) forum
    c) (Teatr) backstage area

    desaparecer or irse por el foro — (fam) to sneak off

    * * *
    = forum [fora, pl.], arena.

    Ex: For example, NEMROC provides a forum for libraries in the region of Newcastle with good collections of audio-visual materials to pool their ideas.

    Ex: This shifts the responsibility for headings and their arrangement into the arena of cataloguers and indexers.
    * foro abierto = open forum.
    * foro de debate = discussion list, listserv(er) [list-serv(er)], newsgroup [news group], electronic forum, open forum, e-mail list, distribution list, electronic distribution list, discussion forum.
    * foro de debate en línea = online forum.
    * foro de discusión = newsgroup [news group], electronic forum.
    * foro de noticias = newsgroup [news group].
    * foro internacional = international forum.

    * * *
    1 ( Hist) forum
    2 ( period) (organismo) forum; (reunión) meeting, forum
    3 ( Teatr) back of the stage
    desaparecer or irse por el foro ( fam); to sneak off, slip away
    Compuestos:
    chat line
    virtual discussion group
    * * *

     

    foro sustantivo masculino
    1 forum
    2 (de discusión) round table, forum
    Jur law court, court of justice
    3 Teat back (of the stage)
    ♦ Locuciones: hacer mutis por el foro, to keep quiet: se fueron haciendo mutis por el foro, they slipped away
    ' foro' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    FORATOM
    English:
    disbar
    - forum
    * * *
    foro nm
    1. [lugar de discusión] forum
    foro de debate forum for debate; Informát foro de discusión discussion group
    2. Teatro back of the stage;
    desaparecer por el foro to slip away unnoticed
    3. Hist [en Roma] forum
    4. [tribunal] court (of law)
    * * *
    m forum;
    irse o
    desaparecer por el foro slip out, slip away
    * * *
    foro nm
    1) : forum
    2) : public assembly, open discussion

    Spanish-English dictionary > foro

  • 2 straight

    streit
    1. adjective
    1) (not bent or curved: a straight line; straight (= not curly) hair; That line is not straight.) recto, liso
    2) ((of a person, his behaviour etc) honest, frank and direct: Give me a straight answer!) honrado, de confianza, sincero, franco
    3) (properly or levelly positioned: Your tie isn't straight.) derecho, recto
    4) (correct and tidy: I'll never get this house straight!; Now let's get the facts straight!) en orden, arreglado
    5) ((of drinks) not mixed: a straight gin.) solo
    6) ((of a face, expression etc) not smiling or laughing: You should keep a straight face while you tell a joke.) serio
    7) ((of an actor) playing normal characters, or (of a play) of the ordinary type - not a musical or variety show.) serio, dramático

    2. adverb
    1) (in a straight, not curved, line; directly: His route went straight across the desert; She can't steer straight; Keep straight on.) recto, directamente
    2) (immediately, without any delay: He went straight home after the meeting.) directamente
    3) (honestly or fairly: You're not playing (= behaving) straight.) francamente, con franqueza

    3. noun
    (the straight part of something, eg of a racecourse: He's in the final straight.) recta
    - straightness
    - straightforward
    - straightforwardly
    - straightforwardness
    - straight talking
    - go straight
    - straight away
    - straighten out/up
    - a straight fight
    - straight off
    straight1 adj
    1. liso
    2. recto / derecho
    3. en orden
    straight2 adv
    1. recto / derecho
    2. directamente
    straight away enseguida / inmediatamente
    tr[streɪt]
    1 (not curved - gen) recto,-a; (- hair) liso,-a
    ■ can you walk in a straight line? ¿puedes caminar en línea recta?
    2 (level, upright) derecho,-a, recto,-a
    ■ backs straight! ¡espalda recta!
    ■ is my tie straight? ¿tengo la corbata recta?
    3 (tidy, neat) en orden, arreglado,-a
    4 (honest - person) honrado,-a, de confianza; (sincere) sincero,-a, franco,-a
    5 (direct - question) directo,-a; (- refusal, rejection) categórico,-a, rotundo,-a
    ■ he gave me a straight "no" for an answer su respuesta fue un "no" rotundo
    6 (correct, accurate) correcto,-a
    ■ have you got your facts straight? ¿tienes la información correcta?
    7 (consecutive) seguido,-a
    8 (drink) solo,-a
    9 (play, actor, etc) serio,-a, dramático,-a
    10 (person - conventional) convencional; (- heterosexual) heterosexual; (non-drug user) que no toma droga
    2 (not in a curve) derecho,-a, recto,-a
    3 (directly) directamente
    4 (immediately) en seguida
    5 (frankly) francamente, con franqueza
    6 (clearly) claro, con claridad
    1 SMALLSPORT/SMALL (in race) recta
    2 (in cards) escalera
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    as straight as an arrow/die (line, direction) derecho,-a como una vela 2 (person) honrado,-a
    the straight and narrow el buen camino
    straight away en seguida
    straight off sin pensarlo, en el acto
    straight up en serio
    to keep a straight face contener la risa
    to play straight (with somebody) jugar limpio (con alguien)
    to put/set the record straight dejar las cosas claras, aclarar las cosas, poner las cosas en su lugar
    to put/set somebody straight (about something) explicar los hechos a alguien
    to vote a/the straight ticket SMALLAMERICAN ENGLISH/SMALL votar a candidatos del mismo partido para todos los cargos
    straight choice alternativa clara
    straight profit beneficio limpio
    straight swap cambio directo
    straight ['streɪt] adv
    1) : derecho, directamente
    go straight, then turn right: sigue derecho, luego gira a la derecha
    2) honestly: honestamente
    to go straight: enmendarse
    3) clearly: con claridad
    4) frankly: francamente, con franqueza
    1) : recto (dícese de las líneas, etc.), derecho (dícese de algo vertical), lacio (dícese del pelo)
    2) honest, just: honesto, justo
    3) neat, orderly: arreglado, ordenado
    adj.
    • derecho, -a adj.
    • directo, -a adj.
    • engallado, -a adj.
    • enhiesto, -a adj.
    • erguido, -a adj.
    • franco, -a adj.
    • liso, -a adj.
    • recto, -a adj.
    • seguido, -a adj.
    • serio, -a adj.
    adv.
    • derechamente adv.
    • derecho adv.
    • directamente adv.
    • recto adv.
    straight* (Sexuality)
    n.
    • buga* s.m.

    I streɪt
    adjective -er, -est
    1)
    a) ( not curved or wavy) recto; < hair> lacio, liso
    b) (level, upright, vertical) (pred)

    to be straight — estar* derecho

    is my tie straight? — ¿tengo la corbata derecha or bien puesta?

    your tie isn't straight — llevas or tienes la corbata torcida

    2) ( in order) (pred)

    is my hair straight? — ¿tengo bien el pelo?

    I have to get o put my room straight — tengo que ordenar mi cuarto

    if I pay for the coffees, we'll be straight — si pago los cafés quedamos or estamos en paz or (CS) a mano

    to get something straight: let's get this straight a ver si nos entendemos; you have to make sure you've got your facts straight tienes que asegurarte de que la información que tienes es correcta; to set the record straight dejar las cosas en claro; to put o set somebody straight about something — aclararle algo a alguien

    3)
    a) (direct, clear) <denial/refusal> rotundo, categórico

    it's a straight choice between buying a car or going on holiday — la alternativa es clara: o se compra un coche o se va de vacaciones

    I made $20,000 straight profit — saqué 20.000 dólares limpios de beneficio

    she got straight A's — ≈sacó sobresaliente en todo

    b) ( unmixed) <gin/vodka> solo
    4) (honest, frank) < question> directo; < answer> claro

    all I want is a straight yes or no — lo único que quiero es que me digas que sí o que no, sin más

    he won in straight sets — ( Sport) ganó sin conceder or sin perder ningún set

    this is the fifth straight day it's happened — (AmE) éste es el quinto día seguido que pasa

    6)
    a) ( serious) <play/actor> dramático, serio
    b) ( conventional) (colloq) convencional
    c) ( heterosexual) (colloq) heterosexual

    II
    1)
    a) ( in a straight line) < walk> en línea recta
    b) ( erect) <sit/stand> derecho
    2)
    a) ( directly) directamente

    I came straight home from work — vine directamente or derecho a casa después del trabajo

    straight after dinner — inmediatamente después de cenar, en cuanto terminé de cenar

    she said straight off she wasn't paying — (colloq) dijo de entrada que ella no pagaba

    I'll come straight to the point — iré derecho or directamente al grano

    3) (colloq)
    a) ( frankly) con franqueza
    b) ( honestly)

    are you playing straight with me? — ¿estás jugando limpio conmigo?

    to go straight: he swore he'd go straight — prometió que se reformaría

    4) ( clearly) <see/think> con claridad
    5) ( Theat) < play> de manera clásica

    III
    [streɪt]
    1. ADJ
    (compar straighter) (superl straightest)
    1) (=not bent or curved) [line, road, nose, skirt] recto; [trousers] de perneras estrechas, de pata estrecha *; [hair] lacio, liso; [shoulders] erguido, recto

    • I couldn't keep a straight face, I couldn't keep my face straight — no podía mantener la cara seria

    2) (=not askew) [picture, rug, hat, hem] derecho

    your tie isn't straight — tienes la corbata torcida, tu corbata no está bien

    • to put or set straight — [+ picture, hat, tie, rug] poner derecho

    3) (=honest, direct) [answer] franco, directo; [question] directo; [refusal, denial] categórico, rotundo

    • all I want is a straight answer to a straight question — lo único que pido es que respondas con franqueza a una pregunta directa

    • it's time for some straight talking — es hora de hablar con franqueza or claramente

    • to be straight with sb — ser franco con algn, hablar a algn con toda franqueza

    4) (=unambiguous) claro

    is that straight? — ¿está claro?

    • to get sth straight, let's get that straight right from the start — vamos a dejar eso claro desde el principio

    have you got that straight? — ¿lo has entendido?, ¿está claro?

    • to put or set sth straight — aclarar algo

    to put or set things or matters straight — aclarar las cosas

    to put or set the record straight — aclarar las cosas

    he soon put or set me straight — enseguida me aclaró las cosas

    5) (=tidy, in order) [house, room] arreglado, ordenado; [books, affairs, accounts] en orden

    • to get or put sth straight — arreglar algo

    6) (=clear-cut, simple) [choice, swap] simple

    we made £50 straight profit on the deal — sacamos 50 libras limpias del negocio

    7) (=consecutive) [victories, defeats, games] consecutivo

    • to get straight As — sacar sobresaliente en todo

    • a straight flush — (in poker) una escalera real

    • she lost in straight sets to Pat Hay — (in tennis) perdió contra Pat Hay sin ganar ningún set

    • we had ten straight wins — ganamos diez veces seguidas, tuvimos diez victorias consecutivas

    8) (=neat) [whisky, vodka] solo
    9) (Theat) (=not comic) [part, play, theatre, actor] dramático, serio
    10) * (=conventional) [person] de cabeza cuadrada *

    she's a nice person, but very straight — es maja pero tiene la cabeza demasiado cuadrada *

    11) * (=not owed or owing money)

    if I give you a fiver, then we'll be straight — si te doy cinco libras, estamos en paz

    12) * (=heterosexual) heterosexual, hetero *
    13) * (=not criminal) [person]
    14) ** (=not using drugs)

    I've been straight for 13 years — hace 13 años que dejé las drogas, llevo 13 años desenganchado de las drogas

    2. ADV
    1) (=in a straight line) [walk, shoot, fly] en línea recta; [grow] recto

    stand up straight! — ¡ponte derecho or erguido!

    • straight above us — directamente encima de nosotros

    • it's straight across the road from us — está justo al otro lado de la calle

    • to go straight ahead — ir todo recto, ir todo derecho

    to look straight ahead — mirar al frente, mirar hacia adelante

    • to look straight at sb — mirar derecho hacia algn

    • to hold o.s. straight — mantenerse derecho

    • to look sb straight in the eye — mirar directamente a los ojos de algn

    • to go straight on — ir todo recto, ir todo derecho

    • the bullet went straight through his chest — la bala le atravesó limpiamente el pecho

    • I saw a car coming straight towards me — vi un coche que venía derecho hacia mi

    • to look straight up — mirar hacia arriba

    2) (=level)

    • to hang straight — [picture] estar derecho

    3) (=directly) directamente; (=immediately) inmediatamente

    I went straight home/to bed — fui derecho a casa/a la cama

    • straight after this — inmediatamente después de esto

    • straight away — inmediatamente, en seguida, al tiro (Chile)

    • straight off — (=without hesitation) sin vacilar; (=immediately) inmediatamente; (=directly) directamente, sin rodeos

    4) (=frankly) francamente, con franqueza

    just give it to me or tell me straight — dímelo francamente or con franqueza

    • to tell sb sth straight out — decir algo a algn sin rodeos or directamente

    • straight up — (Brit) * en serio

    straight from the shoulder —

    5) (=neat) [drink] solo
    6) (=clearly) [think] con claridad
    7) *

    • to go straight — (=reform) [criminal] enmendarse; [drug addict] dejar de tomar drogas, desengancharse

    he's been going straight for a year now — [ex-criminal] hace ahora un año que lleva una vida honrada; [ex-addict] hace un año que dejó las drogas, lleva un año desenganchado de las drogas

    8) (Theat)
    9) (=consecutively)
    3. N
    1) (=straight line)

    • to cut sth on the straight — cortar algo derecho

    2) (Brit) (on racecourse)

    • the straight — la recta

    3) (Cards) runfla f, escalera f
    4) * (=heterosexual) heterosexual mf
    4.
    CPD

    straight angle N — ángulo m llano

    straight arrow * N — (US) estrecho(-a) m / f de miras

    straight man N — actor m que da pie al cómico

    straight razor N — (US) navaja f de barbero

    straight sex N — (=not homosexual) sexo m entre heterosexuales; (=conventional) relaciones fpl sexuales convencionales, sexo m sin florituras *

    straight ticket N (US) (Pol) —

    * * *

    I [streɪt]
    adjective -er, -est
    1)
    a) ( not curved or wavy) recto; < hair> lacio, liso
    b) (level, upright, vertical) (pred)

    to be straight — estar* derecho

    is my tie straight? — ¿tengo la corbata derecha or bien puesta?

    your tie isn't straight — llevas or tienes la corbata torcida

    2) ( in order) (pred)

    is my hair straight? — ¿tengo bien el pelo?

    I have to get o put my room straight — tengo que ordenar mi cuarto

    if I pay for the coffees, we'll be straight — si pago los cafés quedamos or estamos en paz or (CS) a mano

    to get something straight: let's get this straight a ver si nos entendemos; you have to make sure you've got your facts straight tienes que asegurarte de que la información que tienes es correcta; to set the record straight dejar las cosas en claro; to put o set somebody straight about something — aclararle algo a alguien

    3)
    a) (direct, clear) <denial/refusal> rotundo, categórico

    it's a straight choice between buying a car or going on holiday — la alternativa es clara: o se compra un coche o se va de vacaciones

    I made $20,000 straight profit — saqué 20.000 dólares limpios de beneficio

    she got straight A's — ≈sacó sobresaliente en todo

    b) ( unmixed) <gin/vodka> solo
    4) (honest, frank) < question> directo; < answer> claro

    all I want is a straight yes or no — lo único que quiero es que me digas que sí o que no, sin más

    he won in straight sets — ( Sport) ganó sin conceder or sin perder ningún set

    this is the fifth straight day it's happened — (AmE) éste es el quinto día seguido que pasa

    6)
    a) ( serious) <play/actor> dramático, serio
    b) ( conventional) (colloq) convencional
    c) ( heterosexual) (colloq) heterosexual

    II
    1)
    a) ( in a straight line) < walk> en línea recta
    b) ( erect) <sit/stand> derecho
    2)
    a) ( directly) directamente

    I came straight home from work — vine directamente or derecho a casa después del trabajo

    straight after dinner — inmediatamente después de cenar, en cuanto terminé de cenar

    she said straight off she wasn't paying — (colloq) dijo de entrada que ella no pagaba

    I'll come straight to the point — iré derecho or directamente al grano

    3) (colloq)
    a) ( frankly) con franqueza
    b) ( honestly)

    are you playing straight with me? — ¿estás jugando limpio conmigo?

    to go straight: he swore he'd go straight — prometió que se reformaría

    4) ( clearly) <see/think> con claridad
    5) ( Theat) < play> de manera clásica

    III

    English-spanish dictionary > straight

  • 3 entrada

    f.
    1 entry.
    hizo una entrada espectacular she made a spectacular entrance
    2 entrance (place).
    entrada entrance, way in (en letrero)
    te espero a la entrada del cine I'll meet you outside the cinema
    entrada principal main entrance
    3 inlet, intake (Tec).
    entrada libre o gratuita admission free
    sacar una entrada to buy a ticket
    5 audience.
    6 down payment (pago inicial). (peninsular Spanish)
    7 income.
    8 starter (plato).
    9 entry.
    10 beginning, start (principio).
    de entrada no me gustó, pero… at first I didn't like it, but…
    me di cuenta de entrada de que algo andaba mal I realized from the start that something was wrong
    11 input (computing).
    12 admission, adit, accession.
    13 receding hairline.
    14 entree.
    15 entry word, entry, entry word in reference book, headword.
    16 turnout, paying spectators.
    17 data entry.
    18 tackle.
    19 aditus.
    past part.
    past participle of spanish verb: entrar.
    * * *
    1 (gen) entrance, entry
    2 (vestíbulo) hall, entrance
    3 (billete) ticket, admission
    4 (público) audience
    5 (recaudación) takings plural, receipts plural; (ingresos) receipts plural, earnings plural
    6 (de libro, oración, etc) opening; (de año, mes) beginning
    7 (pago inicial) down payment, deposit
    9 COCINA entrée, starter
    10 INFORMÁTICA input
    11 DEPORTE tackle
    \
    dar entrada a to let in, allow in
    de entrada (desde el principio) straight away, from the outset 2 (en comida) for starters
    'Prohibida la entrada' "No admittance"
    tener entradas (en la frente) to have a receding hairline
    entrada de capital capital inflow
    entrada principal main entrance
    media-entrada (aforo) half-capacity crowd
    * * *
    noun f.
    4) entrance, entry
    * * *
    SF
    1) (=lugar de acceso) entrance

    entrada — way in, entrance

    2) (=vestíbulo) [de casa] hall, entrance hall; [de hotel] foyer
    3) (=llegada)
    a) [a un lugar]

    • dar entrada a un lugar — to give access to a place

    nunca podemos platicar, tus visitas son siempre de entrada por salida — we never have time to chat, you're always in and out

    una muchacha de entrada por salida — a non-live-in maid, a daily maid

    b) [de correspondencia] arrival
    c) (Teat) (tb: entrada en escena) entrance (on stage)
    d) (Mús) [de instrumento, voz] entry

    la soprano hizo una entrada muy brusca — the soprano came in very abruptly, the soprano's entry was very abrupt

    e) (Jur) [en un domicilio] entry

    entrada en vigor, tras la entrada en vigor de la ley — after the law came into effect o force

    la entrada en vigor del nuevo presupuesto tendrá lugar en enero — the new budget will take effect from January, the new budget will come into effect o force from January

    4) (=invasión) [de militares] entry; [de turistas, divisas] influx
    5) (=acceso) [a espectáculo] admission, entry; [a país] entry; [a club, institución, carrera] admission

    • dar entrada a algn — [en un lugar] to allow sb in; [en club, sociedad] to admit sb

    no le dimos entrada en nuestra sociedad — he was refused entry to our society, we did not admit him to our society

    • prohibir la entrada a algn — to ban sb from entering

    6) (=billete) ticket

    • media entrada — half price

    • sacar una entrada — to buy a ticket

    7) (=público) (Teat) audience; (Dep) crowd, turnout
    8) (=recaudación) (Teat) receipts pl, takings pl ; (Dep) gate money, receipts pl
    9) (=principio) start

    • de entrada — [desde el principio] from the start, from the outset; [al principio] at first

    de entrada ya nos dijo que no — he said no from the outset, he said no right from the start

    • entrada en materia — introduction

    10) Esp (=primer pago) [al comprar una vivienda, coche] down payment, deposit

    hay que dar un 20% de entrada — you have to put down a 20% deposit, you have to make a down payment of 20%

    "compre sin entrada" — "no down payment", "no deposit"

    11) (Com) [en libro mayor] entry
    12) (=vía de acceso) (Mec) inlet, intake; (Elec) input
    13) (Inform) input

    entrada de datos — data entry, data input

    14) (Ftbl) tackle
    15) (Culin) starter
    16) [de diccionario] entry
    17) pl entradas
    a) [en el pelo] receding hairline sing
    b) (Econ) income sing
    18) Caribe (=ataque) attack, onslaught; (=asalto) assault; (=paliza) beating
    * * *
    1) ( acción) entrance

    la entrada es gratuita — admission o entrance is free

    entrada en or (esp AmL) a algo — entry into something

    tuvieron que forzar su entrada en el or al edificio — they had to force an entry into the building

    su entrada en or a escena — her entrance, her appearance on stage

    de entrada: dijo que no de entrada he said no right from the start; lo calé de entrada — (fam) I sized him up right away o (BrE) straightaway

    2) (en etapa, estado)

    entrada en algo: la entrada en vigor del nuevo impuesto — the coming into effect of the new tax

    3)
    a) (ingreso, incorporación) entry

    entrada en or (esp AmL) a algo: la entrada de Prusia en la alianza Prussia's entry into the alliance; la fecha de su entrada en el club the date he joined the club; esto le facilitó la entrada a la universidad — that made it easier for him to get into university

    b) (Mús) entry
    4)
    a) ( lugar de acceso) entrance

    entrada — entrance, way in

    entrada de artistas — ( en teatro) stage door; ( en sala de conciertos) artists' entrance

    b) ( vestíbulo) hall
    c) ( de tubería) intake, inlet; ( de circuito) input
    5) (Espec)
    a) ( ticket) ticket

    ¿cuánto cuesta la entrada? — how much are the tickets?

    b) ( concurrencia) (Teatr) audience; (Dep) attendance, gate
    c) ( recaudación) (Teatr) takings (pl); (Dep) gate receipts (pl)
    6) ( comienzo) beginning
    7) (Com, Fin)
    a) (Esp) ( depósito) deposit

    pagas $50 de entrada — you pay a $50 down payment o deposit

    b) ( ingreso) income

    entradas y salidas — income and expenditure, receipts and outgoings

    c) ( anotación) entry; ( en diccionario - artículo) entry; (- cabeza de artículo) headword
    8) ( de comida) starter
    9)
    a) ( en fútbol) tackle
    b) ( en béisbol) inning
    10) ( en el pelo)
    * * *
    1) ( acción) entrance

    la entrada es gratuita — admission o entrance is free

    entrada en or (esp AmL) a algo — entry into something

    tuvieron que forzar su entrada en el or al edificio — they had to force an entry into the building

    su entrada en or a escena — her entrance, her appearance on stage

    de entrada: dijo que no de entrada he said no right from the start; lo calé de entrada — (fam) I sized him up right away o (BrE) straightaway

    2) (en etapa, estado)

    entrada en algo: la entrada en vigor del nuevo impuesto — the coming into effect of the new tax

    3)
    a) (ingreso, incorporación) entry

    entrada en or (esp AmL) a algo: la entrada de Prusia en la alianza Prussia's entry into the alliance; la fecha de su entrada en el club the date he joined the club; esto le facilitó la entrada a la universidad — that made it easier for him to get into university

    b) (Mús) entry
    4)
    a) ( lugar de acceso) entrance

    entrada — entrance, way in

    entrada de artistas — ( en teatro) stage door; ( en sala de conciertos) artists' entrance

    b) ( vestíbulo) hall
    c) ( de tubería) intake, inlet; ( de circuito) input
    5) (Espec)
    a) ( ticket) ticket

    ¿cuánto cuesta la entrada? — how much are the tickets?

    b) ( concurrencia) (Teatr) audience; (Dep) attendance, gate
    c) ( recaudación) (Teatr) takings (pl); (Dep) gate receipts (pl)
    6) ( comienzo) beginning
    7) (Com, Fin)
    a) (Esp) ( depósito) deposit

    pagas $50 de entrada — you pay a $50 down payment o deposit

    b) ( ingreso) income

    entradas y salidas — income and expenditure, receipts and outgoings

    c) ( anotación) entry; ( en diccionario - artículo) entry; (- cabeza de artículo) headword
    8) ( de comida) starter
    9)
    a) ( en fútbol) tackle
    b) ( en béisbol) inning
    10) ( en el pelo)
    * * *
    entrada1
    1 = access, entry, influx, membership, accession, admittance, entrée, down payment, tackle, inlet, admission.

    Ex: Access to the contents of data bases is via some computer-searching technique, often using an online terminal.

    Ex: The entry, change, and extraction of word and phrases from abstracts is described in detail in Chapter 9.
    Ex: Many Americans viewed this influx of strangers with alarm.
    Ex: The sharing of expertise through membership of a club of existing users can be valuable.
    Ex: The documents concerning the accession of Greece to the European Communities were published in the official journal in 1979.
    Ex: New rules have made it possible to show films publicly with free admittance.
    Ex: Now that information is being distributed through the visual media, exhibitions can provide an entree for diversified and potentially larger audiences.
    Ex: Programs range from offering affordable on-campus condominiums to lending money for a house down payment.
    Ex: Footage from four decades of English soccer includes hard tackles, pushes and punches from club games.
    Ex: The cell arrival processes on the inlets of the switching element are of a bursty nature.
    Ex: Secondly, the admission of rules incompatible with the general ideology adopted inevitably entails subsequent remedial revision.
    * bandeja de entrada = take-up tray, inbox [in-box].
    * bien entrada la noche = late at night.
    * casillero de entrada = inbox [in-box].
    * conexión de entrada = inlet.
    * dar entrada = enter.
    * dar la entrada para = make + a deposit on.
    * datos de entrada = input data.
    * dispositivo de entrada de información mediante la voz = voice input device.
    * dispositivos de entrada = input equipment.
    * entrada aparatosa = explosive entrance.
    * entrada de aire = air intake.
    * entrada de datos = data entry, input, inputting.
    * entrada de datos sólo una vez = one-time entry.
    * entrada de lleno = plunge into.
    * entrada de nuevo = re-entry [reentry].
    * entrada de vuelta = flowing back.
    * entrada en vigor = entry into force.
    * entrada ilegal = trespass, trespassing.
    * entrada inicial = deposit.
    * entrada precipitada = plunge into.
    * entradas y salidas = comings and goings.
    * fichero de entrada = incoming file.
    * hall de entrada = entrance hall, lobby, entrance foyer.
    * hora de entrada = check-in time.
    * impedir la entrada = keep out.
    * negar la entrada = turn + Nombre + away.
    * norma de entrada de datos = input standard.
    * operario de entrada de datos = data entry operator.
    * paquete de entrada y comprobación de datos = data entry and validation package.
    * precio de entrada = price of admission.
    * prohibida la entrada = no admittance.
    * prohibir la entrada en = ban from.
    * puerta de entrada = entrance gate, entrance door.
    * puerto de entrada = port of entry.
    * punto de entrada = entry point, entrance point, point of entry.
    * rampa de entrada = driveway.
    * registro de entrada = accessions register, accession record.
    * sala de entrada = entrance lobby.
    * señal de entrada prohibida = No Entry sign.
    * sistema de entrada mediante tarjetas = card-entry system.
    * torno de control de entrada = turnstile.
    * válvula de entrada = inlet valve, intake valve.
    * visado de entrada = entry visa.

    entrada2
    2 = entrance, foyer, doorway, gateway, entranceway.

    Ex: Diagrammatic presentation of the layout of the collection conveniently placed, for example, near the entrance.

    Ex: The new library covers 4,700 square metres and shares a foyer with the art gallery.
    Ex: Heads started appearing in the doorway, muttering, 'Oh! So this is the library'.
    Ex: One of the roles of the local library is to act as a gateway to other information sources.
    Ex: The areas surveyed included the circulation and reference areas, the book stacks, the computer terminals, the newspaper reading room, the benches outside of the entranceway, and all other public seating areas.
    * entrada de artistas = stage door.
    * entrada de lectores = public entrance.
    * entrada para automóviles = driveway.
    * entrada para coches = driveway.
    * entrada principal = front entrance, main entrance.
    * esterilla de entrada = doormat.
    * esterilla de la entrada de la casa = welcome mat.

    entrada3
    3 = ticket.

    Ex: Frantic assistants fell over each other's feet trying to retrieve tickets from the rows and rows of issue trays = Los frenéticos auxiliares tropezaban unos con otros intentando coger los tickets de las filas y filas de cajones de préstamo.

    * agencia de venta de entradas = ticket agent, ticket agency.
    * elemento de entrada = entry element.
    * entrada gratis = free ticket.
    * entrada gratuita = free ticket.
    * entrada para otro día = rain cheque [rain check, -USA].
    * revendedor de entradas = ticket tout, ticket scalper.
    * reventa de entradas = scalping.
    * sistema de entrada múltiple = multiple entry system.
    * sistema de entrada única = single entry system.
    * vender todas las entradas de un Evento = sell out.
    * venta de entradas = ticketing.

    entrada4
    Nota: Del pelo.

    Ex: One look at your older brother's receding hairline shows you what's likely ahead.

    entrada5
    5 = entry, heading, index heading, rubric, index record.

    Ex: An entry is a logical grouping of elements arranged in a prescribed order which together constitute a single unit of information to be filed or arranged as such in a register, list, catalogue, etc.

    Ex: A heading is the initial element of an entry, used as the principal filing element when the entry is arranged in an alphabetical listing.
    Ex: If one word is used out of context as an index heading, plainly it will be difficult to establish the interpretation to be placed on the homograph.
    Ex: And, as another instance, it's not fair to employ rubrics for ethnic groups that are not their own, preferred names.
    Ex: Subject indexes consist of a series of index records with each record incorporating a word or phrase describing the subject acting as the access point, and further details.
    * añadir entradas = make + additions.
    * entrada alfabética = alphabetico-specific entry, alphabetical index heading.
    * entrada alfabética de materia = alphabetical subject entry.
    * entrada de autoridades = authority entry.
    * entrada de diario = journal entry.
    * entrada de forma = form entry.
    * entrada de materia = subject entry.
    * entrada de nombre = name entry.
    * entrada de nombre personal = personal name entry.
    * entrada de tesauro = thesaurus entry.
    * entrada directa = direct entry.
    * entrada ficticia = rogue entry.
    * entrada léxica = lexical entry.
    * entrada múltiple = multiple entry.
    * entrada por el título = title main entry.
    * entrada por palabra clave del título = catchword entry.
    * entrada principal = main entry.
    * entrada recíproca = reciprocal entry.
    * entrada secundaria = added entry, additional entry.
    * hacer una entrada = make + entry.
    * palabra de entrada principal = primary entry word.

    * * *
    A (acción) entrance
    hizo su entrada del brazo de su padre she made her entrance on her father's arm
    vigilaban sus entradas y salidas they watched his comings and goings
    [ S ] prohibida la entrada no entry
    la entrada es gratuita admission o entrance is free
    [ S ] entrada libre admission free
    la entrada masiva de divisas the huge inflow of foreign currency
    entrada EN or ( esp AmL) A algo entry INTO sth
    la entrada del ejército en or a la ciudad the entry of the army into the city
    la policía tuvo que forzar su entrada en el or al edificio the police had to force an entry into the building
    su entrada en or a escena fue muy aplaudida her entrance was greeted by loud applause, her appearance on stage was greeted by loud applause
    de entrada: nos dijo que no de entrada he said no at o from the outset, he said no right from the start
    lo calé de entrada ( fam); I sized him up right away o ( BrE) straightaway
    me cayó mal de entrada I disliked him right from the start, I took an immediate dislike to him
    B (en una etapa, un estado) entrada EN algo:
    después de la entrada en vigor del nuevo impuesto after the new tax comes/came into effect o force
    la fecha de entrada en funcionamiento de la nueva central the date for the new power station to begin operating o come into service
    C
    1 (ingreso, incorporación) entry entrada EN or ( esp AmL) A algo:
    la entrada de Prusia en la alianza Prussia's entry into the alliance
    la fecha de su entrada en la empresa/el club the date he joined the company/club
    esto le facilitó la entrada a la universidad this made it easier for him to get into university
    2 ( Mús) entry
    dio entrada a los violines he brought the violins in
    D
    entrada principal main entrance
    [ S ] entrada entrance, way in
    [ S ] entrada de artistas (en un teatro) stage door; (en una sala de conciertos) artists' entrance
    ésta es la única entrada this is the only way in o the only entrance
    te espero a la entrada del estadio I'll wait for you at the entrance to the stadium
    estaban repartiendo estos folletos a la entrada they were handing out these leaflets at the door
    las entradas a León the roads (leading) into León
    3 (de una tubería) intake, inlet; (de un circuito) input
    señal de entrada input signal
    Compuesto:
    air intake o inlet
    E ( Espec)
    1 (billete, ticket) ticket
    ¿cuánto cuesta la entrada? how much is it to get in?, how much are the tickets?
    ya he sacado las entradas I've already bought the tickets
    los niños pagan media entrada it's half-price for children, children pay half price
    2 (concurrencia) ( Teatr) audience; ( Dep) attendance, gate
    la plaza de toros registró media entrada the bullring was half full
    3 (recaudación) ( Teatr) takings (pl); ( Dep) gate receipts (pl)
    F (comienzo) beginning
    con la entrada del invierno with the beginning o onset of winter
    G ( Com, Fin)
    1 (ingreso) income
    ésa es su única entrada that's her only income
    la suma de sus entradas his total income
    entradas y salidas income and expenditure, receipts and outgoings
    2 (anotación) entry
    3 ( Esp) (depósito) deposit
    dar una entrada para una casa/un coche to put down a deposit on a house/a car
    pagas $50 de entrada y el resto en 48 mensualidades you pay a $50 down payment o deposit and the rest in 48 monthly payments
    4 ( Méx) ( Jueg) ante
    ¿cúal or de cúanto es la entrada? what's the ante?
    H (en un diccionario — artículo) entry; (— cabeza de artículo) headword
    I (de una comida) starter
    J (en fútbol) tackle
    K (en béisbol) inning
    L
    (en el pelo): tiene entradas muy pronunciadas he has a badly receding hairline
    * * *

     

    entrada sustantivo femenino
    1 ( acción) entrance;
    ◊ la entrada es gratuita admission o entrance is free;

    vigilaban sus entradas y salidas they watched his comings and goings;

    ( on signs) prohibida la entrada no entry;
    ( on signs) entrada libre admission free;

    entrada en or (esp AmL) a algo entry into sth;
    forzaron su entrada en el or al edificio they forced an entry into the building;
    de entrada right from the start
    2
    a) (en etapa, estado):


    b) (ingreso, incorporación) entry;


    esto le facilitó la entrada a la universidad that made it easier for him to get into university

    espérame en or a la entrada wait for me at the entrance;


    3 (Espec) ticket;

    4 (Com, Fin)
    a) (Esp) ( depósito) deposit



    5 ( de comida) starter
    6 (Dep)



    7 ( en el pelo):

    entrado,-a adj (un periodo de tiempo) advanced: ya está muy entrado el curso, we're well into the school year
    ♦ Locuciones: entrado en años, advanced in years
    entrada sustantivo femenino
    1 (acceso) entrance
    2 (para espectáculos) ticket
    entrada libre, free admission
    3 (concurrencia, taquilla) Dep gate
    Teat attendance
    4 (vestíbulo) hall
    5 (pago inicial) deposit
    6 (en un grupo, lugar) entry: hizo una entrada triunfal, he made a triumphant entry
    7 Culin starter
    8 Com (ingresos) income
    entrada de divisas, inflow of foreign exchange
    9 (en la cabellera) receding hairline
    10 Ftb tackle
    ♦ Locuciones: de entrada, for a start: de entrada nos negamos a aceptar sus condiciones, for a start we refuse to accept their conditions
    ' entrada' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    acceso
    - boca
    - boleto
    - condenar
    - fichar
    - ingreso
    - localidad
    - portal
    - prohibida
    - prohibido
    - reventa
    - sacar
    - sellar
    - tapar
    - tique
    - tíquet
    - vado
    - a
    - adelante
    - aglomeración
    - ajustar
    - antelación
    - asegurar
    - bien
    - bloquear
    - boleta
    - caro
    - coger
    - conseguir
    - cortesía
    - desbloquear
    - entrado
    - franquear
    - impedir
    - negar
    - permitir
    - pórtico
    - prohibir
    - robo
    - servicio
    - sobra
    - triunfal
    - valer
    English:
    access
    - admission
    - admittance
    - bar
    - bound
    - break in
    - burglarize
    - cue
    - deposit
    - doorway
    - down payment
    - drive
    - driveway
    - enter
    - entrance
    - entrance fee
    - entrance requirements
    - entry
    - far
    - fee
    - formality
    - free
    - gate
    - gateway
    - hall
    - hallway
    - inlet
    - input
    - intake
    - into
    - keep out
    - midnight
    - mouth
    - pit stop
    - porch
    - prep school
    - scramble
    - stage door
    - starter
    - tackle
    - ticket
    - ticket holder
    - turn up
    - way
    - admit
    - assure
    - ban
    - door
    - down
    - gross
    * * *
    1. [acción] entry;
    prohibida la entrada [en letrero] no entry;
    hizo una entrada espectacular she made a spectacular entrance;
    la entrada del equipo en el campo fue recibida con aplausos applause broke out when the team came out on to the pitch;
    la entrada de nuevos países a la organización the entry of new countries into the organization;
    están en contra de su entrada en la organización they're opposed to him joining the organization;
    su entrada en escena fue triunfal he made a triumphant entrance;
    celebraron su entrada a o [m5] en la sociedad they celebrated her admission into the society;
    se ha aplazado la entrada en funcionamiento de la nueva línea férrea the opening of the new railway o US railroad line has been postponed;
    dar entrada a to let in, to admit
    entrada en vigor:
    hoy se cumple un año de la entrada en vigor de la ley it is a year today since the act came into force
    2. [lugar] entrance;
    [puerta] doorway; [recibidor] entrance hall; Min adit;
    la entrada al teatro estaba llena de admiradores the theatre entrance was packed with admirers;
    se quedó esperando en la entrada she waited at the entrance;
    te espero a la entrada del cine I'll meet you outside the cinema;
    entrada [en letrero] entrance, way in
    entrada principal main entrance;
    entrada de servicio service entrance
    3. Tec inlet, intake;
    conducto/válvula de entrada intake pipe/valve
    entrada de aire air intake
    4. [en espectáculos] [billete] ticket;
    [recaudación] receipts, takings;
    sacar una entrada (a o [m5] para alguien) to buy a ticket (for sb);
    los mayores de 65 años no pagan entrada people over the age of 65 don't have to pay to get in;
    no hay entradas [en letrero] sold out;
    entrada libre o [m5] gratuita [en letrero] admission free
    5. [público] audience;
    [en estadio] attendance;
    el campo registró menos de media entrada the stadium was less than half full
    6. Esp [pago inicial] down payment, deposit;
    hay que pagar un millón de entrada you have to put down a million as a deposit;
    dimos una entrada de dos millones we paid a deposit of two million
    7. [en contabilidad] income
    8. [en un menú] first course, Br starter, US appetizer
    9. [en la frente]
    tener entradas to have a receding hairline
    10. [en un diccionario] entry
    11. [principio] beginning, start;
    la entrada del año the beginning of the year;
    de entrada: de entrada no me gustó, pero… at first I didn't like it, but…;
    de entrada me insultó y luego me explicó sus motivos first she insulted me, then she explained why;
    me di cuenta de entrada de que algo andaba mal I realized from the start o from the word go that something was wrong;
    de entrada lo reconocí I recognized him right from the start
    12. [en fútbol] tackle;
    entrada dura o [m5] violenta heavy challenge;
    entrada en plancha sliding tackle
    13. [en béisbol] inning
    14. Informát input
    entrada de datos data entry, data input;
    entrada-salida input-output, I/O
    15. Mús
    la entrada de los violines es espectacular violins come in very dramatically
    16. Cuba, Méx [paliza] beating
    17. Comp
    Méx, RP Fam
    dar entrada a alguien [flirtear] to flirt with sb;
    Méx
    de entrada por salida [tiempo] for a moment;
    [persona] paid by the hour
    * * *
    f
    1 acción entry;
    hacer su entrada make one’s entrance
    2 lugar entrance;
    entrada a la autopista on ramp, Br slip road
    3 localidad ticket
    4 pago deposit, downpayment
    :
    entrada del año start o beginning of the year;
    de entrada from the outset, from the start
    6 de comida starter
    7
    :
    entradas pl en frente receding hairline sg
    8 Cu, Méx en béisbol inning
    9 en fútbol tackle;
    hacer una entrada a alguien tackle s.o., make a tackle on s.o.
    * * *
    1) : entrance, entry
    2) : ticket, admission
    3) : beginning, onset
    4) : entrée
    5) : cue (in music)
    6) entradas nfpl
    : income
    entradas y salidas: income and expenditures
    7)
    tener entradas : to have a receding hairline
    * * *
    1. (puerta) entrance
    2. (vestíbulo) hall / hallway
    4. (billete) ticket
    5. (admisión) admission
    6. (depósito) deposit
    cuando se compra un piso, se suele dar una entrada when you buy a flat, you usually pay a deposit
    7. (en fútbol) tackle
    ¡qué entrada más dura! what a nasty tackle!
    de entrada at first / to start with

    Spanish-English dictionary > entrada

  • 4 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 5 together

    tə'ɡeðə
    1) (with someone or something else; in company: They travelled together.) junto(s)
    2) (at the same time: They all arrived together.) juntos, al mismo tiempo
    3) (so as to be joined or united: He nailed/fitted/stuck the pieces of wood together.) juntos; uno con otro...
    4) (by action with one or more other people: Together we persuaded him.) juntos
    •
    - together with
    1. juntos
    2. al mismo tiempo
    tr[tə'geðəSMALLr/SMALL]
    1 (gen) juntos,-as
    2 (simultaneously) a la vez, al mismo tiempo
    3 (nonstop) seguido,-a
    1 familiar (confident, organized, capable) seguro,-a de sí mismo,-a
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    to bring together reunir, juntar
    to get it together organizarse
    to go together ir juntos,-as
    together with junto con
    together [tə'gɛðər] adv
    1) : juntamente, juntos (el uno con el otro)
    Susan and Sarah work together: Susan y Sarah trabajan juntas
    2)
    together with : junto con
    adj.
    • junto, -a adj.
    adv.
    • a la vez adv.
    • a un tiempo adv.
    • de acuerdo adv.
    • juntamente adv.
    • junto adv.
    • juntos adv.

    I tə'geðər, tə'geðə(r)

    they walked together for part of the way — caminaron juntos/juntas un trecho

    we sat together in silence — estuvimos (todos/los dos) sentados en silencio

    they were separated for a while, but they're together again now — estuvieron separados un tiempo, pero ahora han vuelto a juntarse

    these knives and forks don't all belong together — estos cuchillos y tenedores no son del mismo juego; see also come, get, keep together

    2)
    a) (in combination, collaboration)

    let's write the letter together — escribamos juntos/juntas la carta

    pink and orange don't go together very well — el rosa no va or no pega muy bien con el naranja

    b) ( at the same time) juntos

    all together now! — todos (juntos or a la vez)!

    3) (in, into contact)
    5)

    II
    adjective (colloq) centrado, equilibrado
    [tǝ'ɡeðǝ(r)] When together is an element in a phrasal verb, eg bring together, get together, sleep together, look up the verb.
    1. ADV
    1) (=in company) [live, work, be] juntos(-as)

    • all together — todos(-as) juntos*, (-as), todos(-as) en conjunto

    • they belong together — [couple] están hechos el uno para el otro; [socks] esos van juntos

    • let's get it together * — (fig) organicémonos, pongamos manos a la obra

    • we're in this together — estamos metidos todos por igual

    they were all in it together — pej todos estaban metidos en el asunto

    • to put a meal together — preparar una comida

    • together with — junto con

    together with his colleagues, he accepted responsibility — él, junto con sus colegas, admitió ser responsable

    2) (=simultaneously) a la vez

    all together now! — (singing) ¡todos en coro!; (pulling) ¡todos a la vez!

    3) (=continuously) seguidos(-as)
    2.
    ADJ * (=well-adjusted) equilibrado, cabal
    * * *

    I [tə'geðər, tə'geðə(r)]

    they walked together for part of the way — caminaron juntos/juntas un trecho

    we sat together in silence — estuvimos (todos/los dos) sentados en silencio

    they were separated for a while, but they're together again now — estuvieron separados un tiempo, pero ahora han vuelto a juntarse

    these knives and forks don't all belong together — estos cuchillos y tenedores no son del mismo juego; see also come, get, keep together

    2)
    a) (in combination, collaboration)

    let's write the letter together — escribamos juntos/juntas la carta

    pink and orange don't go together very well — el rosa no va or no pega muy bien con el naranja

    b) ( at the same time) juntos

    all together now! — todos (juntos or a la vez)!

    3) (in, into contact)
    5)

    II
    adjective (colloq) centrado, equilibrado

    English-spanish dictionary > together

  • 6 parte

    f.
    1 part.
    repartir algo a partes iguales to share something out equally
    en parte to a certain extent, partly
    por mi/tu parte for my/your part
    por partes bit by bit
    2 part (place).
    en alguna parte somewhere
    en otra parte elsewhere, somewhere else
    no lo veo por ninguna parte I can't find it anywhere
    ¿de qué parte de España es? what part of Spain is he from?, whereabouts in Spain is he from?
    3 side (bando, lado).
    estar/ponerse de parte de alguien to be on/to take somebody's side
    por parte de padre/madre on one's father's/mother's side
    por una parte… por otra… on the one hand… on the other (hand)…
    por otra parte what is more, besides (además)
    tener a alguien de parte de uno to have somebody on one's side
    4 (spare) part, spare (repuesto). (Mexican Spanish)
    5 party, side.
    6 region, place.
    7 communication, communiqué, message, notice.
    m.
    report.
    dar parte (a alguien de algo) to report (something to somebody)
    parte facultativo o médico medical report
    parte meteorológico weather report
    pres.indicat.
    3rd person singular (él/ella/ello) present indicative of spanish verb: partir.
    imperat.
    2nd person singular (tú) Imperative of Spanish verb: partir.
    * * *
    1 (gen) part; (en una partición) portion
    2 (en negocio) share
    3 (lugar) place
    5 DERECHO party
    1 (comunicado) official report
    1 familiar privates, private parts
    \
    dar parte to report
    de parte de on behalf of, from
    ¿de parte de quien? who's calling please?
    en parte partly
    estar de parte de to support
    formar parte de to be part of
    llevar la mejor/peor parte to have the best/worst of it
    no llevar a ninguna parte not to lead anywhere
    por todas partes everywhere
    por una parte,... por otra... on the one hand..., on the other hand...
    tomar parte to take sides
    tomar parte en algo to take part in something
    vamos/vayamos por partes one step at a time
    parte de la oración part of speech
    parte médico medical report
    parte meteorológico weather report
    partes pudendas private parts
    partes vergonzosas private parts
    * * *
    1. noun m.
    report, dispatch
    2. noun f.
    1) part
    3) side, party
    5) role
    •
    - parte delantera
    - parte trasera
    * * *
    I
    SM
    1) (=informe) report

    parte de baja (laboral) — [por enfermedad] doctor's note; [por cese] certificate of leaving employment, ≈ P45

    parte facultativo, parte médico — medical report, medical bulletin

    parte meteorológico — weather forecast, weather report

    2) (Mil) dispatch, communiqué

    parte de guerra — military communiqué, war report

    3) (Radio) † news bulletin
    4) Cono Sur [de boda] wedding invitation; (Aut) speeding ticket
    II
    SF
    1) (=sección) part

    ¿en qué parte del libro te has quedado? — where are you in the book?, which bit of the book are you on at the moment?

    • la parte de abajo — the bottom

    • la parte de arriba — the top

    • la parte de atrás — the back

    • la cuarta parte — a quarter

    • la parte delantera — the front

    • ser parte esencial de algo — to be an essential part of sth

    • la mayor parte de algo, pasé la mayor parte del tiempo leyendo — I spent most of the time reading

    -¿os queda dinero? -sí, aunque ya hemos gastado la mayor parte — "do you have any money left?" - "yes, though we've spent most of it"

    • la tercera parte — a third

    2) [en locuciones]

    • de parte de, llamo de parte de Juan — I'm calling on behalf of Juan

    ¿de parte de quién? — [al teléfono] who's calling?

    • en parte — partly, in part

    se debe en parte a su falta de experiencia — it's partly due to his lack of experience, it's due in part to his lack of experience

    • formar parte de algo, ¿cuándo entró a formar parte de la organización? — when did she join the organization?

    • en gran parte — to a large extent

    • por otra parte — on the other hand

    por una parte... por otra (parte) — on the one hand,... on the other

    • por parte de — on the part of

    yo por mi parte, no estoy de acuerdo — I, for my part, disagree

    • ¡ vayamos por partes! — let's take it one step at a time!

    3) (=participación) share

    • a partes iguales — in equal shares

    • ir a la parte — to go shares

    • tener parte en algo — to share in sth

    • tomar parte (en algo) — to take part (in sth)

    ¿cuántos corredores tomarán parte en la prueba? — how many runners will take part in the race?

    partir
    4) (=lugar) part

    ¿de qué parte de Inglaterra eres? — what part of England are you from?

    ¿en qué parte de la ciudad vives? — where o whereabouts in the city do you live?

    • en alguna parte — somewhere

    • en cualquier parte — anywhere

    • en ninguna parte — nowhere

    por ahí no se va a ninguna parte — (lit) that way doesn't lead anywhere; (fig) that will get us nowhere

    • ir a otra parte — to go somewhere else

    • en o por todas partes — everywhere

    en salva sea la parte Esp euf (=trasero) —

    haba
    5) (=bando) side

    • estar de parte de algn — to be on sb's side

    ¿de parte de quién estás tú? — whose side are you on?

    • ponerse de parte de algn — to side with sb, take sb's side

    6) [indicando parentesco] side
    7) (Dep) [en partido] half

    • primera parte — first half

    • segunda parte — second half

    8) (Teat) part
    9) (Jur) [en contrato] party
    10) pl partes euf (=genitales) private parts euf, privates euf

    partes íntimas, partes pudendas — private parts

    11) pl partes † (=cualidades) parts, qualities, talents
    12) Méx spare part
    * * *
    I
    1) (informe, comunicación) report

    dar parte de un incidente — particular to report an incident; autoridad to file a report about an incident

    2) (Andes) ( multa) ticket (colloq), fine

    me pasaron or me pusieron un parte — I got a ticket o a fine

    II
    1)
    a) (porción, fracción) part

    pasa la mayor or gran parte del tiempo al teléfono — she spends most of her o the time on the phone

    esto se debe en gran parte a... — this is largely due to...

    b) ( de lugar) part

    ¿de qué parte de México eres? — what part of Mexico are you from?

    es, en buena parte, culpa suya — it is, to a large o great extent, his own fault

    muy amable de su parte — (that is/was) very kind of you

    ¿de parte de quién? — ( por teléfono) who's calling?, who shall I say is calling? (frml)

    ¿tú de parte de quién estás? — whose side are you on?

    formar parte de algo — pieza/sección to be part of something; persona/país to belong to something

    por mi/tu/su parte — for my/your/his part

    yo, por mi parte... — I, for my part... (frml), as far as I'm concerned...

    por parte de: fue un error por parte nuestra/de la compañía it was a mistake on our part/on the part of the company; por parte de or del padre on his father's side; por partes: revisémoslo por partes let's go over it section by section; vayamos por partes let's take it step by step; por otra parte ( además) anyway, in any case; ( por otro lado) however, on the other hand; salva sea la parte — (euf & hum) rear (colloq & euph)

    3) ( participación) part
    4) ( lugar)

    ¿adónde vas? - a ninguna parte — where are you going? - nowhere

    a/en todas partes — everywhere

    5) (en negociación, contrato, juicio) party

    la parte demandante — the plaintiff/plaintiffs

    6) (Teatr) part, role

    mandarse la(s) parte(s) (CS) — (fam) to show off

    7) (Méx) ( repuesto) part, spare (part)
    8) partes femenino plural (euf) ( genitales) private parts (pl) (euph)
    •
    * * *
    = body, end, part, part, party, piece, portion, quarter, section, segment, sequence, share, report.
    Nota: Documento que presenta el resultado de las actividades de un individuo o una organización.
    Ex. The main body of criticism centred upon the treatment of nonbook materials.
    Ex. Scanning must start to the left of the bar codes and must continue past the right end.
    Ex. Parts of the abstract are written in the informative style, whilst those points which are of less significance are treated indicatively.
    Ex. A part is one of the subordinate units into which an item has been divided by the author, publisher, or manufacturer.
    Ex. Enter a brief, plea, or other formal record of one party to a case under the heading for that party.
    Ex. Within one main class the same piece of notation may be used to signify different concepts.
    Ex. An extract is one o more portions of a document selected to represent the whole document.
    Ex. A reappraisal is therefore outlined here with the understanding that it is open to rebuttal and challenge from whatever quarter.
    Ex. Plainly such representative sections may not be present in many documents, but sometimes an extract from the results, conclusions or recommendations of a document may serve to identify the key issues covered by the entire document.
    Ex. No such constraints exist where online display is anticipated, since only one segment at a time is displayed.
    Ex. A classified catalogue is a catalogue with three or four separate sequences: an author/title catalogue or index (or separate author and title catalogues), a classified subject catalogue, and a subject index to the classified catalogue.
    Ex. The clicker paid each man according to what he had set, keeping for himself a share equal to that of the most productive hand.
    Ex. The report introduced a range of ideas which have influenced subsequent code construction.
    ----
    * a alguna parte = someplace.
    * abordar una mínima parte del asunto = touch + the tip of the iceberg.
    * ambas partes del argumento = both sides of the fence.
    * a partes iguales = share and share alike, in equal measure(s).
    * buscar por todas partes = scour + Nombre + for.
    * dar parte de = report.
    * de algún tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.
    * de la parte superior = topmost [top most].
    * de otras partes = further afield.
    * de parte de = on behalf of [in behalf of; on + Nombre + behalf], in + Nombre + behalf [in/on behalf of].
    * de parte de otro = on behalf of someone else.
    * de todas las partes del mundo = from all over the world, from all over the globe, from every part of the world.
    * de todas partes = from far and wide.
    * de una parte a otra = back and forth.
    * de un tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.
    * dividir Algo en partes iguales = divide + Nombre + in equal parts.
    * dividir en partes = break into + parts.
    * dividirse en partes = fall into + parts.
    * durante la mayor parte de = for much of.
    * durante la mayor parte del año = for the best part of the year.
    * el todo es más grande que la suma de sus partes = the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.
    * en alguna parte = someplace.
    * en alguna parte de + Nombre = some way down + Nombre.
    * en buena parte = for the most part.
    * en cualquier otra parte = anywhere else, everywhere else.
    * en cualquier parte = anywhere, everywhere.
    * en gran parte = largely, in large part, in large measure, for the most part, to a great extent, to a great degree.
    * en la mayor parte de = in the majority of.
    * en la parte de arriba = at the top.
    * en la parte de atrás = in the back, at the rear.
    * en la parte de delante = at the front.
    * en la parte delantera = at the front.
    * en la parte posterior = in the back.
    * en la parte superior = at the top, uppermost.
    * en la parte trasera = in the back, at the rear.
    * en ninguna parte = nowhere.
    * en otra parte = elsewhere, further afield.
    * en otras partes = further afield.
    * en parte = in part, part of the way, partial, partially, partly.
    * en parte + Nombre = part + Nombre.
    * en qué parte = whereabouts.
    * en su mayor parte = largely, mostly, for the most part.
    * en su parte central = at its core.
    * en todas partes = all around, far and wide, far and wide.
    * entrar a formar parte de = enter in.
    * entre tres partes = 3-party [three-party].
    * en varias partes = multi-part [multipart].
    * extenderse por todas partes = reach + far and wide, extend + far and wide, stretch + far and wide.
    * formar parte = form + part.
    * formar parte de = be part of, be part of, build into, enter into, become + (a) part of, be a part of, inhere in, become + one with, inform, fall under.
    * formar parte del paisaje = blend into + the landscape.
    * formar parte de un comite = serve on + committee.
    * formar parte integral = form + an integral part.
    * formar parte integral de = be an integral part of.
    * formar parte natural de su entorno = blend into + the landscape.
    * gran parte = much.
    * gran parte de = much of.
    * hacer de + Posesivo + parte = do + Posesivo + bit.
    * la mayor parte de = the majority of, the main bulk of, the lion's share of.
    * la mayor parte de las veces = more often than not.
    * la parte de atrás de = the back of.
    * la parte más dura de = brunt of, the.
    * la parte más importante = the heart of.
    * la parte principal de = the bulk of.
    * la parte superior izquierda de = the upper left of.
    * la parte trasera de = the back of.
    * llamamiento para formar parte de un jurado = jury duty.
    * llegar a todas partes = reach + far and wide, extend + far and wide, stretch + far and wide.
    * lo mejor de ambas partes = the best of both worlds.
    * más que la suma de sus partes = Comparativo + than the sum of its parts.
    * mínima parte = fraction.
    * no considerarse parte de = hold + Reflexivo + apart from.
    * no llevar a ninguna parte = achieve + nothing, go + nowhere.
    * numeración de las partes = numbering of parts.
    * parte afectada = stakeholder.
    * parte anterior del pie = ball of + Posesivo + foot.
    * parte azotada por el viento = windward.
    * parte de accidente = accident report.
    * parte de atrás = back, backside, rear.
    * parte delantera = fore-end.
    * parte de una obra = component part.
    * parte de una publicación = component part.
    * parte en un contrato = contracting party.
    * parte expuesta al viento = windward.
    * parte implicada = stakeholder.
    * parte inferior = bottom, underside.
    * parte inferior derecha = lower right.
    * parte integral = integral part.
    * parte integrante = integral part, fixture.
    * parte interesada = interested party, stakeholder, concerned party.
    * parte metereológico = weather forecast.
    * parte musical = part.
    * parte posterior = backside, rear.
    * parte principal del texto = meat of the text.
    * parte protegida = lee.
    * parte protegida del viento = leeward.
    * parte que falta = missing part.
    * partes = bits and pieces.
    * partes beligerantes = warring factions, warring parties.
    * partes de un conflicto = warring factions, warring parties.
    * parte segunda = revisited.
    * partes en cuestión, las = parties concerned, the.
    * partes enfrentadas = warring factions, warring parties.
    * partes implicadas, las = parties involved, the, parties concerned, the.
    * parte superior = top, topside.
    * parte trasera = back, rear.
    * parte vital = lifeblood.
    * parte Y la parte superior izquierda de = the upper left of.
    * pero por otra parte = but then again.
    * poner de + Posesivo + parte = do + Posesivo + part, do + Posesivo + share, do + Posesivo + bit.
    * ponerse de parte de = side with.
    * ponerse de parte de Alguien = side in + Posesivo + favour.
    * poner todo de + Posesivo + parte = give + Posesivo + best, do + Posesivo + best, give + Posesivo + utmost.
    * por otra parte = on the other hand, on the other side, on the flip side.
    * por parte de = on the part of.
    * por parte de uno = on + Posesivo + part.
    * por + Posesivo + parte = for + Posesivo + part.
    * por todas partes = all over the place, everywhere, widely, all around, far and wide.
    * por una parte = on the one hand, on the one side.
    * Posesivo + partes = Posesivo + family jewels, Posesivo + privates.
    * Posesivo + partes íntimas = Posesivo + privates, Posesivo + family jewels.
    * Posesivo + partes privadas = Posesivo + crown jewels, Posesivo + family jewels, Posesivo + privates.
    * Posesivo + partes pudendas = Posesivo + family jewels.
    * Posesivo + partes pudendas = Posesivo + privates.
    * que forma parte de la cultura = culturally-embedded.
    * que forma parte en = involved in.
    * que toma parte en = involved in.
    * relación parte/todo = whole/part relationship.
    * segunda parte = sequel, follow-up.
    * ser parte de = be part of, be a part of, fall under.
    * sinónimo en parte = near synonym.
    * subparte = subpart.
    * tenemos intereses en ambas partes = our feet are in both worlds.
    * todas las partes implicadas = all concerned.
    * tomar parte = involve, take + part, become + involved.
    * tomar parte activa = become + involved, get + active.
    * tomar parte en = join in.
    * tomar parte en el asunto = enter + the fray.
    * tomar parte en en el asunto = be part of the picture.
    * una buena parte de = a large measure of, a good deal of, a great deal of.
    * una cuarta parte = one-quarter (1/4), one in four.
    * una cuarta parte de = a fourth of.
    * una décima parte = one tenth [one-tenth], one in ten.
    * una gran parte de = a broad population of, a lion's share of.
    * una octava parte = one in eight.
    * una parte de = a share of, a snatch of.
    * una quinta parte = one-fifth [one fifth], one in five.
    * una quinta parte de = a fifth of.
    * una tercera parte = one third (1/3), one in three.
    * * *
    I
    1) (informe, comunicación) report

    dar parte de un incidente — particular to report an incident; autoridad to file a report about an incident

    2) (Andes) ( multa) ticket (colloq), fine

    me pasaron or me pusieron un parte — I got a ticket o a fine

    II
    1)
    a) (porción, fracción) part

    pasa la mayor or gran parte del tiempo al teléfono — she spends most of her o the time on the phone

    esto se debe en gran parte a... — this is largely due to...

    b) ( de lugar) part

    ¿de qué parte de México eres? — what part of Mexico are you from?

    es, en buena parte, culpa suya — it is, to a large o great extent, his own fault

    muy amable de su parte — (that is/was) very kind of you

    ¿de parte de quién? — ( por teléfono) who's calling?, who shall I say is calling? (frml)

    ¿tú de parte de quién estás? — whose side are you on?

    formar parte de algo — pieza/sección to be part of something; persona/país to belong to something

    por mi/tu/su parte — for my/your/his part

    yo, por mi parte... — I, for my part... (frml), as far as I'm concerned...

    por parte de: fue un error por parte nuestra/de la compañía it was a mistake on our part/on the part of the company; por parte de or del padre on his father's side; por partes: revisémoslo por partes let's go over it section by section; vayamos por partes let's take it step by step; por otra parte ( además) anyway, in any case; ( por otro lado) however, on the other hand; salva sea la parte — (euf & hum) rear (colloq & euph)

    3) ( participación) part
    4) ( lugar)

    ¿adónde vas? - a ninguna parte — where are you going? - nowhere

    a/en todas partes — everywhere

    5) (en negociación, contrato, juicio) party

    la parte demandante — the plaintiff/plaintiffs

    6) (Teatr) part, role

    mandarse la(s) parte(s) (CS) — (fam) to show off

    7) (Méx) ( repuesto) part, spare (part)
    8) partes femenino plural (euf) ( genitales) private parts (pl) (euph)
    •
    * * *
    = body, end, part, part, party, piece, portion, quarter, section, segment, sequence, share, report.
    Nota: Documento que presenta el resultado de las actividades de un individuo o una organización.

    Ex: The main body of criticism centred upon the treatment of nonbook materials.

    Ex: Scanning must start to the left of the bar codes and must continue past the right end.
    Ex: Parts of the abstract are written in the informative style, whilst those points which are of less significance are treated indicatively.
    Ex: A part is one of the subordinate units into which an item has been divided by the author, publisher, or manufacturer.
    Ex: Enter a brief, plea, or other formal record of one party to a case under the heading for that party.
    Ex: Within one main class the same piece of notation may be used to signify different concepts.
    Ex: An extract is one o more portions of a document selected to represent the whole document.
    Ex: A reappraisal is therefore outlined here with the understanding that it is open to rebuttal and challenge from whatever quarter.
    Ex: Plainly such representative sections may not be present in many documents, but sometimes an extract from the results, conclusions or recommendations of a document may serve to identify the key issues covered by the entire document.
    Ex: No such constraints exist where online display is anticipated, since only one segment at a time is displayed.
    Ex: A classified catalogue is a catalogue with three or four separate sequences: an author/title catalogue or index (or separate author and title catalogues), a classified subject catalogue, and a subject index to the classified catalogue.
    Ex: The clicker paid each man according to what he had set, keeping for himself a share equal to that of the most productive hand.
    Ex: The report introduced a range of ideas which have influenced subsequent code construction.
    * a alguna parte = someplace.
    * abordar una mínima parte del asunto = touch + the tip of the iceberg.
    * ambas partes del argumento = both sides of the fence.
    * a partes iguales = share and share alike, in equal measure(s).
    * buscar por todas partes = scour + Nombre + for.
    * dar parte de = report.
    * de algún tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.
    * de la parte superior = topmost [top most].
    * de otras partes = further afield.
    * de parte de = on behalf of [in behalf of; on + Nombre + behalf], in + Nombre + behalf [in/on behalf of].
    * de parte de otro = on behalf of someone else.
    * de todas las partes del mundo = from all over the world, from all over the globe, from every part of the world.
    * de todas partes = from far and wide.
    * de una parte a otra = back and forth.
    * de un tiempo a esta parte = for some time now.
    * dividir Algo en partes iguales = divide + Nombre + in equal parts.
    * dividir en partes = break into + parts.
    * dividirse en partes = fall into + parts.
    * durante la mayor parte de = for much of.
    * durante la mayor parte del año = for the best part of the year.
    * el todo es más grande que la suma de sus partes = the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.
    * en alguna parte = someplace.
    * en alguna parte de + Nombre = some way down + Nombre.
    * en buena parte = for the most part.
    * en cualquier otra parte = anywhere else, everywhere else.
    * en cualquier parte = anywhere, everywhere.
    * en gran parte = largely, in large part, in large measure, for the most part, to a great extent, to a great degree.
    * en la mayor parte de = in the majority of.
    * en la parte de arriba = at the top.
    * en la parte de atrás = in the back, at the rear.
    * en la parte de delante = at the front.
    * en la parte delantera = at the front.
    * en la parte posterior = in the back.
    * en la parte superior = at the top, uppermost.
    * en la parte trasera = in the back, at the rear.
    * en ninguna parte = nowhere.
    * en otra parte = elsewhere, further afield.
    * en otras partes = further afield.
    * en parte = in part, part of the way, partial, partially, partly.
    * en parte + Nombre = part + Nombre.
    * en qué parte = whereabouts.
    * en su mayor parte = largely, mostly, for the most part.
    * en su parte central = at its core.
    * en todas partes = all around, far and wide, far and wide.
    * entrar a formar parte de = enter in.
    * entre tres partes = 3-party [three-party].
    * en varias partes = multi-part [multipart].
    * extenderse por todas partes = reach + far and wide, extend + far and wide, stretch + far and wide.
    * formar parte = form + part.
    * formar parte de = be part of, be part of, build into, enter into, become + (a) part of, be a part of, inhere in, become + one with, inform, fall under.
    * formar parte del paisaje = blend into + the landscape.
    * formar parte de un comite = serve on + committee.
    * formar parte integral = form + an integral part.
    * formar parte integral de = be an integral part of.
    * formar parte natural de su entorno = blend into + the landscape.
    * gran parte = much.
    * gran parte de = much of.
    * hacer de + Posesivo + parte = do + Posesivo + bit.
    * la mayor parte de = the majority of, the main bulk of, the lion's share of.
    * la mayor parte de las veces = more often than not.
    * la parte de atrás de = the back of.
    * la parte más dura de = brunt of, the.
    * la parte más importante = the heart of.
    * la parte principal de = the bulk of.
    * la parte superior izquierda de = the upper left of.
    * la parte trasera de = the back of.
    * llamamiento para formar parte de un jurado = jury duty.
    * llegar a todas partes = reach + far and wide, extend + far and wide, stretch + far and wide.
    * lo mejor de ambas partes = the best of both worlds.
    * más que la suma de sus partes = Comparativo + than the sum of its parts.
    * mínima parte = fraction.
    * no considerarse parte de = hold + Reflexivo + apart from.
    * no llevar a ninguna parte = achieve + nothing, go + nowhere.
    * numeración de las partes = numbering of parts.
    * parte afectada = stakeholder.
    * parte anterior del pie = ball of + Posesivo + foot.
    * parte azotada por el viento = windward.
    * parte de accidente = accident report.
    * parte de atrás = back, backside, rear.
    * parte delantera = fore-end.
    * parte de una obra = component part.
    * parte de una publicación = component part.
    * parte en un contrato = contracting party.
    * parte expuesta al viento = windward.
    * parte implicada = stakeholder.
    * parte inferior = bottom, underside.
    * parte inferior derecha = lower right.
    * parte integral = integral part.
    * parte integrante = integral part, fixture.
    * parte interesada = interested party, stakeholder, concerned party.
    * parte metereológico = weather forecast.
    * parte musical = part.
    * parte posterior = backside, rear.
    * parte principal del texto = meat of the text.
    * parte protegida = lee.
    * parte protegida del viento = leeward.
    * parte que falta = missing part.
    * partes = bits and pieces.
    * partes beligerantes = warring factions, warring parties.
    * partes de un conflicto = warring factions, warring parties.
    * parte segunda = revisited.
    * partes en cuestión, las = parties concerned, the.
    * partes enfrentadas = warring factions, warring parties.
    * partes implicadas, las = parties involved, the, parties concerned, the.
    * parte superior = top, topside.
    * parte trasera = back, rear.
    * parte vital = lifeblood.
    * parte Y la parte superior izquierda de = the upper left of.
    * pero por otra parte = but then again.
    * poner de + Posesivo + parte = do + Posesivo + part, do + Posesivo + share, do + Posesivo + bit.
    * ponerse de parte de = side with.
    * ponerse de parte de Alguien = side in + Posesivo + favour.
    * poner todo de + Posesivo + parte = give + Posesivo + best, do + Posesivo + best, give + Posesivo + utmost.
    * por otra parte = on the other hand, on the other side, on the flip side.
    * por parte de = on the part of.
    * por parte de uno = on + Posesivo + part.
    * por + Posesivo + parte = for + Posesivo + part.
    * por todas partes = all over the place, everywhere, widely, all around, far and wide.
    * por una parte = on the one hand, on the one side.
    * Posesivo + partes = Posesivo + family jewels, Posesivo + privates.
    * Posesivo + partes íntimas = Posesivo + privates, Posesivo + family jewels.
    * Posesivo + partes privadas = Posesivo + crown jewels, Posesivo + family jewels, Posesivo + privates.
    * Posesivo + partes pudendas = Posesivo + family jewels.
    * Posesivo + partes pudendas = Posesivo + privates.
    * que forma parte de la cultura = culturally-embedded.
    * que forma parte en = involved in.
    * que toma parte en = involved in.
    * relación parte/todo = whole/part relationship.
    * segunda parte = sequel, follow-up.
    * ser parte de = be part of, be a part of, fall under.
    * sinónimo en parte = near synonym.
    * subparte = subpart.
    * tenemos intereses en ambas partes = our feet are in both worlds.
    * todas las partes implicadas = all concerned.
    * tomar parte = involve, take + part, become + involved.
    * tomar parte activa = become + involved, get + active.
    * tomar parte en = join in.
    * tomar parte en el asunto = enter + the fray.
    * tomar parte en en el asunto = be part of the picture.
    * una buena parte de = a large measure of, a good deal of, a great deal of.
    * una cuarta parte = one-quarter (1/4), one in four.
    * una cuarta parte de = a fourth of.
    * una décima parte = one tenth [one-tenth], one in ten.
    * una gran parte de = a broad population of, a lion's share of.
    * una octava parte = one in eight.
    * una parte de = a share of, a snatch of.
    * una quinta parte = one-fifth [one fifth], one in five.
    * una quinta parte de = a fifth of.
    * una tercera parte = one third (1/3), one in three.

    * * *
    A (informe, comunicación) report
    me veo obligado a dar parte de este incidente I shall have to report this incident o file a report about this incident
    dio parte de sin novedad ( Mil) he reported that all was well
    Compuestos:
    death certificate
    dispatch
    medical report o bulletin
    medical report o bulletin
    weather report
    B ( Andes) (multa) ticket ( colloq), fine
    me pasaron or sacaron or pusieron un parte I got a ticket o a fine
    A
    1 (porción, fracción) part
    divídelo en tres partes iguales divide it into three equal parts
    una sexta parte de los beneficios a sixth of the profits
    entre 180 y 300 partes por millón between 180 and 300 parts per million
    parte de lo recaudado part of the money collected
    destruyó la mayor parte de la cosecha it destroyed most of the harvest
    la mayor parte del tiempo most of her/your/the time
    la mayor parte de los participantes the majority of o most of the participants
    su parte de la herencia his share of the inheritance
    tenemos nuestra parte de responsabilidad en el asunto we have to accept part of o a certain amount of responsibility in this affair
    por fin me siento parte integrante del equipo I finally feel I'm a full member of the team
    forma parte integral del libro it is an integral part of the book
    la parte antigua de la ciudad the old part of the city
    soy español — ¿de qué parte (de España)? I'm Spanish — which part (of Spain) are you from?
    en la parte de atrás de la casa at the back of the house
    atravesamos la ciudad de parte a parte we crossed from one side of the city to the other
    Compuestos:
    part of speech
    lion's share
    B ( en locs):
    en parte partly
    en parte es culpa tuya it's partly your fault
    esto se debe, en gran parte, al aumento de la demanda this is largely due to the increase in demand
    es, en buena parte, culpa suya it is, to a large o great extent, his own fault
    de un tiempo a esta parte for some time now
    de cinco meses a esta parte la situación se ha venido deteriorando the situation has been deteriorating these past five months o over the past five months
    de mi/tu/su parte from me/you/him
    díselo de mi parte tell him from me
    dale saludos de parte de todos nosotros give him our best wishes o say hello from all of us
    dale recuerdos de mi parte give him my regards
    llévale esto a Pedro de mi parte take Pedro this from me
    muy amable de su parte (that is/was) very kind of you
    de parte del director que subas a verlo the director wants you to go up and see him, the director says you're to go up and see him
    ¿de parte de quién? (por teléfono) who's calling?, who shall I say is calling? ( frml)
    ¿tú de parte de quién estás? whose side are you on?
    se puso de su parte he sided with her
    yo te ayudaré, pero tú también tienes que poner de tu parte I'll help you, but you have to do your share o part o ( BrE colloq) bit
    forman parte del mecanismo de arranque they are o they form part of the starting mechanism
    forma parte de la delegación china she's a member of the Chinese delegation
    forma parte del equipo nacional she's a member of the national team, she's on ( AmE) o ( BrE) in the national team
    por mi/tu/su parte for my/your/his part
    yo, por mi parte, no tengo inconveniente I, for my part, have no objection ( frml), as far as I'm concerned, there's no problem
    por parte de on the part of
    exige un conocimiento de la materia por parte del lector it requires the reader to have some knowledge of the subject, it requires some knowledge of the subject on the part of the reader
    reclamaron una mayor atención a este problema por parte de la junta they demanded that the board pay greater attention to this problem
    su interrogatorio por parte del fiscal his questioning by the prosecutor
    por parte de or del padre on his father's side
    por partes: revisémoslo por partes let's go over it section by section
    vayamos por partes ¿cómo empezó la discusión? let's take it step by step, how did the argument start?
    por otra parte (además) anyway, in any case; (por otro lado) however, on the other hand
    salva sea la parte ( euf hum); derrière ( euph hum), sit-upon ( BrE euph hum)
    el que parte y reparte se lleva la mejor parte he who cuts the cake takes the biggest slice
    yo no tuve parte en eso I played no part in that
    no le dan parte en la toma de decisiones she isn't given any say in decision-making
    no quiso tomar parte en el debate she did not wish to take part in o to participate in the debate
    los atletas que tomaron parte en la segunda prueba the athletes who competed in o took part in o participated in the second event
    D
    (lugar): vámonos a otra parte let's go somewhere else o ( AmE) someplace else
    va a pie a todas partes she goes everywhere on foot, she walks everywhere
    se consigue en cualquier parte you can get it anywhere
    en todas partes everywhere
    tiene que estar en alguna parte it must be somewhere
    no aparece por ninguna parte I can't find it anywhere o it's nowhere to be found
    este camino no lleva a ninguna parte this path doesn't lead anywhere
    esta discusión no nos va a llevar a ninguna parte this discussion isn't going to get us anywhere
    mandar a algn a buena parte ( Chi fam euf); to tell sb to go take a running jump ( colloq), to tell sb to go to blazes ( colloq dated)
    en todas partes (se) cuecen habas it's the same the world over
    E
    1 (en negociaciones, un contrato) party
    las partes contratantes the parties to the contract
    las partes firmantes the signatories
    ambas partes están dispuestas a negociar both sides are ready to negotiate
    2 ( Der) party
    soy parte interesada I'm an interested party
    Compuesto:
    opposing party
    F ( Teatr) part, role
    mandarse la parte( RPl) or ( Chi) las partes ( fam); to show off
    G ( Méx) (repuesto) part, spare part, spare
    H partes fpl ( euf) (genitales) private parts (pl) ( euph), privates (pl) ( colloq euph)
    Compuestos:
    ( euf); private parts (pl) ( euph), pudenda (pl) ( frml)
    ( euf); private parts (pl) ( euph)
    * * *

     

    Del verbo partir: ( conjugate partir)

    parte es:

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) presente indicativo

    2ª persona singular (tú) imperativo

    Multiple Entries:
    parte    
    partir
    parte sustantivo masculino
    1 (informe, comunicación) report;


    [ autoridad] to file a report about an incident;

    parte meteorológico weather report
    2 (Andes) ( multa) ticket (colloq), fine
    ■ sustantivo femenino
    1
    a) (porción, fracción) part;


    pasa la mayor parte del tiempo al teléfono she spends most of her o the time on the phone;
    la mayor parte de los participantes the majority of o most of the participants


    c) ( de lugar) part;

    ◊ ¿de qué parte de México eres? what part of Mexico are you from?;

    en la parte de atrás at the back
    2 ( en locs)

    en gran parte to a large extent, largely;
    en su mayor parte for the most part;
    de un tiempo a esta parte for some time now;
    de parte de algn on behalf of sb;
    llamo de parte de María I'm ringing on behalf of María;
    dale recuerdos de mi parte give him my regards;
    vengo de parte del señor Díaz Mr Díaz sent me;
    ¿de parte de quién? ( por teléfono) who's calling?, who shall I say is calling? (frml);
    formar parte de algo [pieza/sección] to be part of sth;

    [persona/país] to belong to sth;

    por mi/tu/su parte as far as I'm/you're/he's concerned;
    por partes: revisémoslo por partes let's go over it section by section;
    vayamos por partes let's take it step by step;
    por otra parte ( además) anyway, in any case;

    ( por otro lado) however, on the other hand;
    ◊ por una parte …, por la otra … on the one hand …, on the other …

    3 ( participación) part;

    4 ( lugar):
    ◊ vámonos a otra parte let's go somewhere else o (AmE) someplace else;

    esto no nos lleva a ninguna parte this isn't getting o leading us anywhere;
    ¿adónde vas? — a ninguna parte where are you going? — nowhere;
    en cualquier parte anywhere;
    a/en/por todas partes everywhere;
    en alguna parte somewhere
    5 (en negociación, contrato, juicio) party
    6 (Teatr) part, role
    7 (Méx) ( repuesto) part, spare (part)
    partir ( conjugate partir) verbo transitivo
    a) ( con cuchillo) ‹tarta/melón› to cut;


    b) ( romper) ‹piedra/coco› to break, smash;

    ‹nuez/avellana› to crack;
    ‹rama/palo› to break

    ‹ cabeza› to split open
    d) [ frío] ‹ labios› to chap

    verbo intransitivo
    1
    a) (frml) ( marcharse) to leave, depart (frml)

    b) [ auto] (Chi) to start

    2
    a) parte DE algo ‹de una premisa/un supuesto› to start from sth

    b)


    a parte de ahora/ese momento from now on/that moment on;
    a parte de hoy (as o starting) from today
    partirse verbo pronominal
    a) [mármol/roca] to split, smash

    b) ( refl) ‹ labio› to split;

    ‹ diente› to break, chip
    parte
    I sustantivo femenino
    1 (porción, trozo) part: esas danzas y esos ritos forman parte de nuestra cultura, those dances and rites are part of our culture
    2 (de dinero, herencia, etc) share
    3 (lado, sitio) place, spot: lo puedes encontrar en cualquier parte, you can find it anywhere
    4 (en un enfrentamiento, discusión) side: ¿de qué parte estás?, whose side are you on?
    está de mi parte, he's on my side
    tomar parte en, to take part in: no deberíamos tomar parte en esas discusiones, we shouldn't take part in those discussions
    5 Jur party
    II sustantivo masculino
    1 (informe, comunicación) report: tienes que dar parte a la policía, you must inform the police
    parte médico/meteorológico, medical/weather report
    2 Rad Tel news
    ♦ Locuciones: de parte a parte: el espejo se rompió de parte a parte, the mirror broke in two
    de parte de..., on behalf of...
    Tel ¿de parte de quién?, who's calling?
    en gran parte, to a large extent
    en parte, partly
    por mi parte, as far as I am concerned
    por otra parte, on the other hand
    partir
    I verbo transitivo
    1 (romper, quebrar) to break: me parte el corazón verte tan desalentada, it's heartbreaking to see you so depressed
    partir una nuez, to shell a walnut
    2 (dividir) to split, divide
    (con un cuchillo) to cut
    II vi (irse) to leave, set out o off
    ♦ Locuciones: a partir de aquí/ahora, from here on/now on
    a partir de entonces no volvimos a hablarnos, we didn't speak to each other from then on
    ' parte' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    abotargarse
    - accionariado
    - adherirse
    - adormecerse
    - alma
    - anterior
    - apéndice
    - arriba
    - arte
    - bajón
    - caída
    - caído
    - chimenea
    - colonizar
    - consignar
    - cuarta
    - cuarto
    - de
    - deber
    - décima
    - décimo
    - deformar
    - deformarse
    - delicadeza
    - derecha
    - derecho
    - desnuda
    - desnudo
    - distribuir
    - elemento
    - encima
    - encoger
    - episodio
    - ser
    - escarpa
    - este
    - exterior
    - fondo
    - fuera
    - gruesa
    - grueso
    - infante
    - infrahumana
    - infrahumano
    - integrar
    - integrante
    - jirón
    - juez
    - les
    - más
    English:
    account for
    - act
    - again
    - against
    - agenda
    - anywhere
    - appeal
    - away
    - back
    - backbone
    - backroom
    - begin
    - behalf
    - bikini
    - body
    - bottom
    - bulk
    - buy out
    - call
    - civil
    - claw back
    - come away
    - come under
    - component
    - constituent
    - cross-examine
    - croup
    - cut
    - damage
    - day
    - dispatch
    - element
    - else
    - engage in
    - for
    - fourteenth
    - fraction
    - front
    - good
    - half
    - hear of
    - inner
    - integral
    - join
    - join in
    - largely
    - linchpin
    - lion
    - listen
    - mostly
    * * *
    parte1 nm
    1. [informe] report;
    dar parte (a alguien de algo) to report (sth to sb);
    dimos parte del incidente a la policía we reported the incident to the police
    parte de accidente [para aseguradora] (accident) claim form;
    parte facultativo medical report;
    parte de guerra dispatch;
    parte médico medical report;
    parte meteorológico weather report
    2. Anticuado [noticiario] news bulletin
    3. Andes [multa] fine [for a traffic offence]
    parte2 nf
    1. [porción, elemento, división] part;
    hizo su parte del trabajo he did his share of the work;
    las partes del cuerpo the parts of the body;
    “El Padrino, Segunda parte” “The Godfather, Part Two”;
    la mayor parte de la población most of the population;
    la tercera parte de a third of;
    repartir algo a partes iguales to share sth out equally;
    fue peligroso y divertido a partes iguales it was both dangerous and fun at the same time;
    dimos la lavadora vieja como parte del pago we traded in our old washing machine in part exchange;
    en parte to a certain extent, partly;
    en gran parte [mayoritariamente] for the most part;
    [principalmente] to a large extent;
    en su mayor parte están a favor they're mostly in favour, most of them are in favour;
    esto forma parte del proyecto this is part of the project;
    forma parte del comité she's a member of the committee;
    cada uno puso de su parte everyone did what they could;
    por mi/tu/ etc[m5]. parte for my/your/ etc part;
    por mi parte no hay ningún problema it's fine as far as I'm concerned;
    hubo protestas por parte de los trabajadores the workers protested, there were protests from the workers;
    lo hicimos por partes we did it bit by bit;
    ¡vamos por partes! [al explicar, aclarar] let's take one thing at a time!;
    ser parte integrante de algo to be o form an integral part of sth;
    llevarse la mejor/peor parte to come off best/worst;
    tomar parte en algo to take part in sth;
    llevarse la parte del león to get the lion's share;
    CSur
    mandarse la parte to put on airs;
    Euf
    en salva sea la parte: le dio un puntapié en salva sea la parte she gave him a kick up the rear;
    segundas partes nunca fueron buenas things are never as good the second time round
    Gram parte de la oración part of speech
    2. [lado, zona] part;
    la parte de abajo/de arriba, la parte inferior/superior the bottom/top;
    la parte trasera/delantera, la parte de atrás/de delante the back/front;
    el español que se habla en esta parte del mundo the Spanish spoken in this part of the world;
    viven en la parte alta de la ciudad they live in the higher part of the city;
    ¿de qué parte de Argentina es? what part of Argentina is he from?, whereabouts in Argentina is he from?;
    la bala le atravesó el cerebro de parte a parte the bullet went right through his brain;
    por una parte…, por otra… on the one hand…, on the other (hand)…;
    por otra parte [además] what is more, besides
    Méx parte baja [en béisbol] end of the inning
    3. [lugar, sitio] part;
    he estado en muchas partes I've been lots of places;
    ¡tú no vas a ninguna parte! you're not going anywhere!;
    en alguna parte somewhere;
    en otra parte elsewhere, somewhere else;
    en o [m5] por todas partes everywhere;
    no lo veo por ninguna parte I can't find it anywhere;
    esto no nos lleva a ninguna parte this isn't getting us anywhere;
    2.000 pesos no van a ninguna parte 2,000 pesos won't get you far;
    en todas partes cuecen habas it's the same wherever you go
    4. [bando] side;
    las partes enfrentadas o [m5] en conflicto the opposing parties o sides;
    estar/ponerse de parte de alguien to be on/to take sb's side;
    ¿tú de qué parte estás? whose side are you on?;
    es pariente mío por parte de padre he's related to me on my father's side;
    tener a alguien de parte de uno to have sb on one's side
    5. Der [en juicio, transacción] party;
    no hubo acuerdo entre las partes the two sides were unable to reach an agreement;
    las partes interesadas the interested parties
    la parte acusadora the prosecution;
    parte contratante party to the contract;
    6. Euf [genitales]
    partes privates;
    partes pudendas private parts;
    recibió un balonazo en sus partes a ball hit him in the privates
    7. Méx [repuesto] (spare) part, spare
    8. [en frases]
    de parte de on behalf of, for;
    traigo un paquete de parte de Juan I've got a parcel for you from Juan;
    venimos de parte de la compañía de seguros we're here on behalf of the insurance company, we're from the insurance company;
    de parte de tu madre, que vayas a comprar leche your mother says for you to go and buy some milk;
    dale recuerdos de mi parte give her my regards;
    fue muy amable/generoso de tu parte it was very kind/generous of you;
    ¿de parte de (quién)? [al teléfono] who's calling, please?;
    de un tiempo a esta parte for some time now;
    de un mes/unos años a esta parte for the last month/last few years
    * * *
    I m report;
    dar parte a alguien inform s.o.;
    dar parte file a report
    II f
    1 trozo part;
    en parte partly;
    en gran parte largely;
    la mayor parte de the majority of, most of;
    formar parte de form part of;
    tomar parte en take part in;
    tener parte en algo play a part in sth;
    la parte del león the lion’s share;
    ir por partes do a job in stages o bit by bit;
    llevar la mejor/peor parte be at an advantage/a disadvantage
    2 JUR party;
    partes contratantes contracting parties, parties to the contract
    3 ( lugar)
    :
    alguna parte somewhere;
    otra parte somewhere else;
    en o
    por todas partes everywhere;
    conducir a ninguna parte fig be going nowhere;
    en otra parte elsewhere
    4
    :
    de parte de on o in behalf of
    5
    :
    por parte de madre/padre on one’s mother’s/father’s side;
    estar de parte de alguien be on s.o.’s side;
    ponerse de parte de alguien take s.o.’s side;
    por una parte … por otra parte on the one hand … on the other (hand)
    6
    :
    por otra parte moreover
    7
    :
    desde un tiempo a esta parte up to now, up until now
    * * *
    parte nm
    : report, dispatch
    parte nf
    1) : part, share
    2) : part, place
    en alguna parte: somewhere
    por todas partes: everywhere
    3) : party (in negotiations, etc.)
    4)
    de parte de : on behalf of
    5)
    ¿de parte de quién? : may I ask who's calling?
    6)
    tomar parte : to take part
    * * *
    1. (en general) part
    ¿de qué parte de Inglaterra eres? which part of England are you from?
    2. (a favor de) side
    ¿de parte de quién estás? whose side are you on?
    a ninguna parte nowhere / not... anywhere
    de parte de... from...
    ¿de parte de quién? who's calling?
    poner de tu parte to do your share / to do your bit

    Spanish-English dictionary > parte

  • 7 lock

    I noun
    (ringlet) Locke, die
    II 1. noun
    1) (of door etc.) Schloss, das

    under lock and key — unter [strengem] Verschluss

    2) (on canal etc.) Schleuse, die
    3) (on wheel) Sperrvorrichtung, die; Sperre, die
    4) (Wrestling) Fesselgriff, der; Klammergriff, der
    5)

    lock, stock, and barrel — (fig.) mit allem Drum und Dran (ugs.)

    6) (Motor Veh.) Lenkeinschlag, der
    2. transitive verb
    1) (fasten) zuschließen; abschließen

    lock or shut the stable door after the horse has bolted — (fig.) den Brunnen erst zudecken, wenn das Kind hineingefallen ist

    lock somebody/something in something — jemanden/etwas in etwas (Akk.) [ein]schließen

    lock somebody/something out of something — jemanden/etwas aus etwas aussperren

    3) in p.p. (joined)

    the wrestlers were locked in combat — die Ringer hielten sich im Fesselgriff

    3. intransitive verb
    [Tür, Kasten usw.:] sich ab-/zuschließen lassen
    Phrasal Verbs:
    - academic.ru/43514/lock_away">lock away
    * * *
    I 1. [lok] noun
    1) (a mechanism for fastening doors etc: He put the key in the lock.) das Schloß
    2) (a closed part of a canal for raising or lowering boats to a higher or lower part of the canal.) die Schleusenkammer
    3) (the part of a gun by which it is fired.) das Schloß
    4) (a tight hold (in wrestling etc).) die Fessel
    2. verb
    (to fasten or become fastened with a lock: She locked the drawer; This door doesn't lock.) ver-, abschließen
    - locker
    - locket
    - locksmith
    - lock in
    - lock out
    - lock up     II [lok] noun
    1) (a piece of hair: She cut off a lock of his hair.) die Locke
    2) ((in plural) hair: curly brown locks.) die Locke
    * * *
    lock1
    [lɒk, AM lɑ:k]
    I. n
    1. (fastening device) Schloss nt
    combination \lock Kombinationsschloss nt
    bicycle \lock Fahrradschloss nt
    steering \lock Lenkradschloss nt
    2. NAUT Staustufe f, Schleuse f
    3. (in wrestling) Fesselgriff m
    to hold sb in a body \lock jdn fest umklammert halten
    4. no pl BRIT, AUS AUTO Wendekreis m
    5. AM ( fam: certain winner) sicherer Gewinner/sichere Gewinnerin
    6. (certainty) Gewissheit f
    ▪ to be a \lock feststehen
    she's a \lock for promotion this year es ist völlig sicher, dass sie dieses Jahr befördert wird
    ▪ to \lock sth onto sth etw auf etw akk einstellen
    8.
    ▶ to have a \lock on sth AM ( fam) etw fest in der Hand haben fig
    they have had a \lock on the market for years sie kontrollieren den Markt schon seit Jahren
    ▶ to be under \lock and key hinter Schloss und Riegel sitzen fam
    ▶ \lock, stock and barrel ganz und gar
    we're moving our things \lock, stock and barrel to another city wir ziehen mit Sack und Pack in eine andere Stadt
    he rejected my idea \lock, stock and barrel er hat meine Idee in Bausch und Bogen verworfen
    II. vt
    ▪ to \lock sth etw abschließen
    he \locked the confidential documents in his filing cabinet er schloss die vertraulichen Dokumente in den Aktenschrank
    to \lock a suitcase einen Koffer verschließen
    to \lock a building ein Gebäude zuschließen [o SÜDD, ÖSTERR zusperren]; COMPUT access to accounts, data sperren
    2. usu passive (entangle) sich akk verhaken
    I'm afraid our ship is \locked in ice ich fürchte, unser Schiff steckt im Eis fest
    to \lock one's hands behind sb's neck jds Hals umklammern
    to be \locked in an embrace sich akk eng umschlungen halten
    to be \locked in a struggle sich akk umklammert halten
    to be \locked in discussions in Diskussionen verwickelt werden
    III. vi
    1. (become secured) schließen
    2. (become fixed) binden
    our gazes \locked wir konnten den Blick nicht mehr voneinander [ab]wenden
    3. NAUT eine Schleuse passieren
    lock2
    [lɒk, AM lɑ:k]
    n
    1. (curl) [Haar]locke f
    2. ( poet: hair)
    ▪ \locks pl Haar nt kein pl
    long, flowing \locks langes, wallendes Haar geh
    * * *
    I [lɒk]
    n
    (of hair) Locke f II
    1. n
    1) (on door, box, gun) Schloss nt

    to put/keep sb under lock and key — jdn hinter Schloss und Riegel bringen/verwahren

    he offered me the house lock, stock and barrel — er bot mir das Haus mit allem Drum und Dran an

    they destroyed it lock, stock and barrel — sie haben es total zerstört

    to own sth lock, stock and barrel — etw ganz besitzen

    2) (= canal lock) Schleuse f
    3) (= hold) Fesselgriff m
    4) (AUT) Wendekreis m
    2. vt
    door etc ab- or zuschließen; steering wheel sperren, arretieren; wheel blockieren; (COMPUT) file locken (spec)

    this bar locks the wheel in position —

    See:
    → stable
    3. vi
    schließen; (wheel) blockieren

    a suitcase that locks — ein verschließbarer Koffer, ein Koffer, der sich abschließen lässt

    the lion's jaws locked round his arm — der Kiefer des Löwen schloss sich fest um seinen Arm

    * * *
    lock1 [lɒk; US lɑk]
    A s
    1. Schloss n (an Türen etc):
    a) hinter Schloss und Riegel (Person),
    b) unter Verschluss (Sache)
    2. Verschluss m, Schließe f
    3. Sperrvorrichtung f, Sicherung f
    4. Bremsvorrichtung f
    5. (Gewehr- etc) Schloss n:
    lock, stock, and barrel fig
    a) mit allem Drum und Dran,
    b) mit Stumpf und Stiel, voll und ganz, ganz und gar,
    c) mit Sack und Pack
    6. Schleuse(nkammer) f
    7. Luft-, Druckschleuse f
    8. AUTO etc Br Einschlag m (der Vorderräder):
    be on full lock voll eingeschlagen sein
    9. a) Knäuel m/n (von Fahrzeugen)
    10. Ringen: Fessel(ung) f
    B v/t
    1. auch lock up ab-, zu-, verschließen, zu-, versperren:
    lock the stable door after the horse has bolted ( oder been stolen) den Brunnen (erst) zudecken, wenn das Kind hineingefallen ist
    a) jemanden einschließen, (ein)sperren ( beide:
    in, into in akk), einsperren (gefangen setzen):
    lock o.s. up sich einschließen
    b) → lock up A 2
    3. umschließen, umfassen, in die Arme schließen:
    a) festgekeilt,
    b) eng umschlungen,
    c) ineinander verkrallt;
    locked by mountains von Bergen umschlossen
    4. ineinanderschlingen, die Arme verschränken:
    lock horns fig (hart) aneinandergeraten ( with mit)
    5. TECH sperren, sichern, arretieren, festklemmen
    6. (beim Ringen) (um-)fassen
    7. ein Schiff (durch)schleusen
    8. einen Kanal etc mit Schleusen ausstatten
    C v/i
    1. schließen
    2. sich ab-, zu- oder verschließen lassen, ab- oder verschließbar sein
    3. ineinandergreifen
    4. AUTO etc blockieren (Räder)
    5. AUTO etc Br
    a) sich einschlagen lassen (Räder)
    b) sich durch Einschlag der Vorderräder lenken lassen (Fahrzeug)
    6. (durch)geschleust werden
    a) (Radar) ein Ziel etc erfassen und verfolgen,
    b) FLUG, MIL sich richten auf (akk) (Geschoss)
    lock2 [lɒk; US lɑk] s
    1. (Haar) Locke f, (-)Strähne f, (-)Büschel n
    2. pl meist poet ( besonders lockiges) Haar
    3. (Woll) Flocke f
    * * *
    I noun
    (ringlet) Locke, die
    II 1. noun
    1) (of door etc.) Schloss, das

    under lock and key — unter [strengem] Verschluss

    2) (on canal etc.) Schleuse, die
    3) (on wheel) Sperrvorrichtung, die; Sperre, die
    4) (Wrestling) Fesselgriff, der; Klammergriff, der
    5)

    lock, stock, and barrel — (fig.) mit allem Drum und Dran (ugs.)

    6) (Motor Veh.) Lenkeinschlag, der
    2. transitive verb
    1) (fasten) zuschließen; abschließen

    lock or shut the stable door after the horse has bolted — (fig.) den Brunnen erst zudecken, wenn das Kind hineingefallen ist

    lock somebody/something in something — jemanden/etwas in etwas (Akk.) [ein]schließen

    lock somebody/something out of something — jemanden/etwas aus etwas aussperren

    3) in p.p. (joined)
    3. intransitive verb
    [Tür, Kasten usw.:] sich ab-/zuschließen lassen
    Phrasal Verbs:
    * * *
    (Maritime) n.
    Flüssigkeitsheber m.
    Schleuse -n f. n.
    Schloss -¨er n.
    Sperre -n f.
    Verschluss ¨-e m. v.
    abschließen v.
    absperren v.
    arretieren v.
    verriegeln v.
    verschließen v.
    zuschließen v.

    English-german dictionary > lock

  • 8 Coolidge, William David

    SUBJECT AREA: Electricity, Metallurgy
    [br]
    b. 23 October 1873 Hudson, Massachusetts, USA
    d. 3 February 1975 New York, USA
    [br]
    American physicist and metallurgist who invented a method of producing ductile tungsten wire for electric lamps.
    [br]
    Coolidge obtained his BS from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) in 1896, and his PhD (physics) from the University of Leipzig in 1899. He was appointed Assistant Professor of Physics at MIT in 1904, and in 1905 he joined the staff of the General Electric Company's research laboratory at Schenectady. In 1905 Schenectady was trying to make tungsten-filament lamps to counter the competition of the tantalum-filament lamps then being produced by their German rival Siemens. The first tungsten lamps made by Just and Hanaman in Vienna in 1904 had been too fragile for general use. Coolidge and his life-long collaborator, Colin G. Fink, succeeded in 1910 by hot-working directly dense sintered tungsten compacts into wire. This success was the result of a flash of insight by Coolidge, who first perceived that fully recrystallized tungsten wire was always brittle and that only partially work-hardened wire retained a measure of ductility. This grasped, a process was developed which induced ductility into the wire by hot-working at temperatures below those required for full recrystallization, so that an elongated fibrous grain structure was progressively developed. Sintered tungsten ingots were swaged to bar at temperatures around 1,500°C and at the end of the process ductile tungsten filament wire was drawn through diamond dies around 550°C. This process allowed General Electric to dominate the world lamp market. Tungsten lamps consumed only one-third the energy of carbon lamps, and for the first time the cost of electric lighting was reduced to that of gas. Between 1911 and 1914, manufacturing licences for the General Electric patents had been granted for most of the developed work. The validity of the General Electric monopoly was bitterly contested, though in all the litigation that followed, Coolidge's fibering principle was upheld. Commercial arrangements between General Electric and European producers such as Siemens led to the name "Osram" being commonly applied to any lamp with a drawn tungsten filament. In 1910 Coolidge patented the use of thoria as a particular additive that greatly improved the high-temperature strength of tungsten filaments. From this development sprang the technique of "dispersion strengthening", still being widely used in the development of high-temperature alloys in the 1990s. In 1913 Coolidge introduced the first controllable hot-cathode X-ray tube, which had a tungsten target and operated in vacuo rather than in a gaseous atmosphere. With this equipment, medical radiography could for the first time be safely practised on a routine basis. During the First World War, Coolidge developed portable X-ray units for use in field hospitals, and between the First and Second World Wars he introduced between 1 and 2 million X-ray machines for cancer treatment and for industrial radiography. He became Director of the Schenectady laboratory in 1932, and from 1940 until 1944 he was Vice-President and Director of Research. After retirement he was retained as an X-ray consultant, and in this capacity he attended the Bikini atom bomb trials in 1946. Throughout the Second World War he was a member of the National Defence Research Committee.
    [br]
    Bibliography
    1965, "The development of ductile tungsten", Sorby Centennial Symposium on the History of Metallurgy, AIME Metallurgy Society Conference, Vol. 27, ed. Cyril Stanley Smith, Gordon and Breach, pp. 443–9.
    Further Reading
    D.J.Jones and A.Prince, 1985, "Tungsten and high density alloys", Journal of the Historical Metallurgy Society 19(1):72–84.
    ASD

    Biographical history of technology > Coolidge, William David

  • 9 Titt, John Wallis

    [br]
    b. 1841 Cheriton, Wiltshire, England
    d. May 1910 Warminster, Wiltshire, England
    [br]
    English agricultural engineer and millwright who developed a particular form of wind engine.
    [br]
    John Wallis Titt grew up on a farm which had a working post-mill, but at 24 years of age he joined the firm of Wallis, Haslam \& Stevens, agricultural engineers and steam engine builders in Basingstoke. From there he went to the millwrighting firm of Brown \& May of Devizes, where he worked for five years.
    In 1872 he founded his own firm in Warminster, where his principal work as an agricultural engineer was on hay and straw elevators. In 1876 he moved his firm to the Woodcock Ironworks, also in Warminster. There he carried on his work as an agricultural engineer, but he also had an iron foundry. By 1884 the firm was installing water pumps on estates around Warminster, and it was about that time that he built his first wind engines. Between 1884 and 1903, when illness forced his retirement, his wind engines were built primarily with adjustable sails. These wind engines, under the trade marks "Woodcock" and "Simplex", consisted of a lattice tower with the sails mounted on a a ring at the top. The sails were turned to face the wind by means of a fantail geared to the ring or by a wooden vane. The important feature lay in the sails, which were made of canvas on a wood-and-iron frame mounted in a ring. The ends of the sail frames were hinged to the sail circumferences. In the middle of the sail a circular strap was attached so that all the frames had the same aspect for a given setting of the bar. The importance lies in the adjustable sails, which gave the wind engine the ability to work in variable winds.
    Whilst this was not an original patent of John Wallis Titt, he is known to be the only maker of wind engines in Britain who built his business on this highly efficient form of sail. In design terms it derives from the annular sails of the conventional windmills at Haverhill in Suffolk and Roxwell in Essex. After his retirement, his sons reverted to the production of the fixed-bladed galvanized-iron wind engine.
    [br]
    Further Reading
    J.K.Major, 1977, The Windmills of John Wallis Titt, The International Molinological Society.
    E.Lancaster Burne, 1906, "Wind power", Cassier' Magazine 30:325–6.
    KM

    Biographical history of technology > Titt, John Wallis

  • 10 service

    1. сущ.
    1) общ. услуга, одолжение; помощь

    It was of great service to him during his illness. — Это была огромная помощь для него во время болезни.

    to be out of service — быть без работы, бездельничать

    My friend did me a service in fixing the door. — Мой друг оказал мне услугу, починив дверь.

    2)
    а) эк. услуга, услуги, обслуживание, сервис (работа, осуществляемая для заказчика в процессе экономической деятельности компании или организации); предоставление услуг ( деятельность в сфере услуг)

    ATTRIBUTES:

    high service — обслуживание [сервис\] на высоком уровне

    premium quality [premium grade\] service — услуга премиального качества

    COMBS:

    to provide a service — оказывать услугу, обслуживать

    See:
    accessorial services, ancillary service, a la carte service, account reconcilement service, accounting service 1), actual service 3), advertising services, advisory service 2), ancillary service 1), assurance services, augmented service, banking services, business reply service, business reply service, carry-out service, consumer service 2), consumer services, contract services, core service, 1), 3), dealer service, delivery service 1), factor services, field service 1), financial intermediation services indirectly measured, financial services, freight services, free services, freight services, full service, home service 1), 2), 3), in-flight service, investment-related services, legal services, limited service, managerial services, market services, medical service, 1), &2 non-factor services, non-market services, non-material services, non-productive services, passenger services, productive services, tax services, trade-related services, balance of services, contract for services, exports of services, quality of service, range of services, service account, service dealer, service dumping, service export, service firm, service import, service mark, services account, services deficit, service director, service manager, services market, services marketing, services surplus, services trade, service worker а), trade in services, balance on goods and services, exports of goods and services, final goods and services, goods and service tax, Bank Export Services Act, Extended Balance of Payments Services Classification, FIATA Model Rules for Freight Forwarding Services, Nice Agreement Concerning the International Classification of Goods and Services for the Purposes of the Registration of Marks, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980, Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act, 1980
    б) эк. техническое обслуживание (установка, подготовка к эксплуатации, сервисное обслуживание, чистка, ремонт оборудования или иной техники)

    COMBS:

    Syn:
    See:
    в) эк. обслуживание (за столом) (накрывание стола, подача еды и т. д., напр., услуги официанта, бармена); прислуживание (работа на кого-л. вышестоящего по положению или должности; обычно: работа домашней прислуги)

    They complained of poor bar service. — Они пожаловались на плохое обслуживание в баре.

    I found the butler's service to be excellent. — На мой взгляд, дворецкий выполнял свои обязанности безукоризненно.

    See:
    3)

    COMBS:

    service crime — служебное преступление, преступление по службе

    duty of service — служебная [воинская\] обязанность

    record of service, service record — послужной список

    condition of service — условия работы [прохождения службы\]

    to go out of service, to leave the service — уйти с работы

    He has been in the company's service for 15 years. — Он работает в этой компании уже 15 лет.

    See:
    б) эк. служба, работа, эксплуатация (работа оборудования, техники)

    COMBS:

    disposable [fit\] for service — годный для эксплуатации [использования\]

    The computer should provide good service for years. — Компьютер должен работать хорошо в течение многих лет.

    See:
    4)
    а) гос. упр. государственная служба (социально-правовой институт и сфера деятельности государственных гражданских служащих и военнослужащих)

    COMBS:

    See:
    б) воен. армия, вооруженные силы (какой-л. страны; используется c определенным артиклем); род войск

    COMBS:

    He joined the service right after college. — Сразу после колледжа он пошел в армию.

    Syn:
    See:
    5) гос. упр. обслуживание населения*; услуги населению* (в т. ч. предоставление коммунальных услуг, обеспечение общественным транспортом, средствами коммуникации и т. д.)

    ATTRIBUTES:

    regular service — регулярное обслуживание, регулярное (транспортное) сообщение

    rail [railway\] service — железнодорожное сообщение, железнодорожный транспорт [перевозки\]

    Syn:
    See:
    6) фин., банк. обслуживание долга ( выплата процентов и основной суммы)
    Syn:
    See:
    7)
    а) гос. упр. служба, агентство, бюро (государственный орган или предприятие, оказывающее услуги населению и в той или иной степени регулируемое государством)
    Syn:
    agency 1), bureau 2), office 3) а), administration 4) а)
    See:
    accounting service 2), inspection service, intelligence service, patent service 2), Agricultural Marketing Service, Agricultural Research Service, American Forces Information Service, Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Central Security Service, Congressional Research Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service, Cooperative State Research, Education and Extension Service
    б) эк. служба, отдел (подразделение организации, обслуживающее ее основную деятельность; также независимая фирма, оказывающая услуги)
    Syn:
    See:
    8) юр. исполнение постановления суда; вручение повестки ( в суд)

    to acknowledge service — получать подтверждение юридического документа (напр., повестки)

    COMBS:

    speedy service of your documents on both defendants and witnesses — быстрое вручение ваших документов как ответчикам, так и свидетелям

    See:
    9) общ. церковная служба; религиозный обряд
    10) потр. сервиз (полный набор столовой или чайной посуды, рассчитанный на определенное количество человек)

    ATTRIBUTES:

    Syn:
    See:
    11) эк. сфера услуг
    Syn:
    12) эк. = service charge
    2. гл.

    to service customers — обслуживать покупателей [клиентов\]

    The electric company services all nine counties. — Эта энергетическая компания обслуживает все девять округов.

    2) эк. осуществлять [проводить\] техническое обслуживание

    to service the equipment — обслуживать оборудование, осуществлять ремонт оборудования

    It is time to get my car serviced. — Пора проходить техобслуживание.

    to service a debt [a loan\] — обслуживать долг [заем\]

    See:

    * * *
    услуга, обслуживание: 1) банковская услуга; 2) обслуживание долга: своевременная выплата процентов; = debt service; 3) бытовая платная услуга населению: мойка машины, стирка, ремонт часов и т. д.

    Англо-русский экономический словарь > service

  • 11 Parkhurst, Edward G.

    [br]
    b. 29 August 1830 Thompson, Connecticut, USA
    d. 31 July 1901 Hartford, Connecticut, USA
    [br]
    American mechanical engineer and inventor.
    [br]
    Little is known of the early training of Edward G. Parkhurst, but at the time of Civil War (1861–5) he was employed by the Savage Arms Company of Middletown, Connecticut. In 1869 he joined the Pratt \& Whitney Company of Hartford, Connecticut, as Assistant Superintendent and later took charge of their gun department. He was the inventor of many improvements in machine tools and armaments. Among these was an automatic rod feeder for turret lathes, in which movement of a single lever enabled bar stock to be fed through the lathe spindle and gripped by a collet chuck while the machine was in motion. This was patented in August 1871 and was followed by other patents, particularly for improvements in machine guns and their accessories. Parkhurst retired from Pratt \& Whitney c. 1895 but was afterwards associated with the American Ordnance Company and the Bethlehem Steel Company. He was a founder member of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers in 1880 and served his home city of Hartford as Councillor and Alderman. In 1900 he contributed to the journal American Machinist some articles of reminiscences dealing with the early history of the American machine-tool industry and, in particular, the earliest milling machines and the origin of the turret lathe.
    RTS

    Biographical history of technology > Parkhurst, Edward G.

  • 12 FYRIR

    * * *
    prep.
    I. with dat.
    1) before, in front of (ok vóru fyrir honum borin merkin);
    fyrir dyrum, before the door;
    2) before one, in one’s presence;
    hón nefndist fyrir þeim Gunnhildr, she told them that her name was G.;
    3) for;
    hann lét ryðja fyrir þeim búðina, he had the booth cleared for them, for their reception;
    4) before one, in one’s way;
    fjörðr varð fyrir þeim, they came to a fjord;
    sitja fyrir e-m, to lie in wait for one;
    5) naut. term. before, off;
    liggja fyrir bryggjum, to lie off the piers;
    fyrir Humru-mynni, off the Humber;
    6) before, at the head of, over;
    vera fyrir liði, to be over the troops;
    vera fyrir máli, to lead the case;
    sitja fyrir svörum, to undertake the defence;
    7) of time, ago;
    fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago;
    fyrir stundu, a while ago;
    fyrir löngu, long ago;
    vera fyrir e-u, to forebode (of a dream);
    8) before, above, superior to;
    Hálfdan svarti var fyrir þeim brœðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers;
    9) denoting disadvantige, harm, suffering;
    þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest E. thwart all thy affairs;
    tók at eyðast fyrir herm lausa-fé, her money began to fail;
    10) denoting obstacle, hindrance;
    mikit gøri þer mér fyrir þessu máli, you make this case hard for me;
    varð honum lítit fyrir því, it was a small matter for him;
    Ásgrími þótti þungt fyrir, A. thought that things looked bad;
    11) because of, for;
    hon undi sér hvergri fyrir verkjum, she had no rest for pains;
    fyrir hræðslu, for fear;
    illa fœrt fyrir ísum, scarcely, passable for ice;
    gáðu þeir eigi fyrir veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing, they neglected to make hay;
    fyrir því at, because, since, as;
    12) against;
    gæt þín vel fyrir konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men;
    beiða griða Baldri fyrir alls konar háska, against all kinds of harm;
    13) fyrir sér, of oneself;
    mikill fyrir sér, strong, powerful;
    minnstr fyrir sér, smallest, weakest;
    14) denoting manner or quality, with;
    hvítr fyrir hærum, while with hoary hair;
    II. with acc.
    1) before, in front of;
    halda fyrir augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes;
    2) before, into the presence of;
    stefna e-m fyrir dómstól, before a court;
    3) over;
    hlaupa fyrir björg, to leap over a precipice;
    kasta fyrir borð, to throw overboard;
    4) in one’s way, crossing one’s way;
    ríða á leið fyrir þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them;
    5) round, off;
    sigla fyrir nes, to weather a point;
    6) along, all along;
    fyrir endilangan Noreg, all along Norway, from one end to the other;
    draga ör fyrir odd, to draw the arrow past the point;
    7) of time, fyrir dag, before day;
    fyrir e-s minni, before one’s memory;
    8) for, on behalf of;
    vil ek bjóða at fara fyrir þik, I will offer to go for thee, in thy stead;
    lögvörn fyrir mál, a lawful defence for a case;
    9) for, for the benefit of;
    þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, they cut the lyme-grass for them (the horses);
    10) for, instead of, in place of, as;
    11) for, because of (vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit);
    fyrir þín orð, for thy words (intercession);
    fyrir sína vinsæld, by reason of his popularity;
    12) denoting value, price;
    fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks;
    fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost;
    13) in spite of, against (giptast fyrir ráð e-s);
    14) joined with adverbs ending in -an, governing acc. (fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan);
    fyrir austan, sunnan fjall, east, south of the fell;
    fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge;
    fyrir handan á, beyond the river;
    fyrir innan garð, inside the fence;
    III. as adverb or ellipt.
    1) ahead, before, opp. to eptir;
    þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, when this came first, preceded;
    2) first;
    mun ek þar eptir gera sem þér gerit fyrir, I shall do to you according as you do first;
    3) at hand, present, to the fore;
    föng þau, er fyrir vóru, stores that were at hand;
    þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already present (before the bride and bridegroom came);
    4) e-m verðr e-t fyrir, one takes a certain step, acts so and so;
    Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. was at a loss what to do;
    e-t mælist vel (illa) fyrir, a thing is well (ill) spoken or reported of (kvæðit mæltist vel fyrir).
    * * *
    prep., in the Editions spelt differently; in MSS. this word is usually abbreviated either  (i. e. firir), or Ꝼ̆, fur͛, fvr͛ (i. e. fyrir); in some MSS. it is idiomatically spelt with i, fir͛, e. g. Arna-Magn. 382 (Bs. i. 263 sqq.); and even in the old Miracle-book Arna-Magn. 645 (Bs. i. 333 sqq.), just as ifir is written for yfir ( over); in a few MSS. it is written as a monosyllable fyr, e. g. D. I. i. 475, Mork. passim; in Kb. (Sæm.-Edda) occurs fyr telia, Vsp. I; fyr norðan, 36; fyr dyrum, Gm. 22; fyr vestan ver, Hkv. 2. 8; in other places as a dissyll. fyrir, e. g. Hm. 56, Gm. 54, Skm. 34, Ls. 15, Am. 64, Hkv. 2. 2, 19 (quoted from Bugge’s edition, see his preface, p. xvi); fyr and fyrir stand to one another in the same relation as ept to eptir, und to undir, of ( super) to yfir: this monosyllabic form is obsolete, save in the compds, where ‘for-’ is more common than ‘fyrir-;’ in some cases both forms are used, e. g. for-dæming and fyrir-dæming; in others only one, but without any fixed rule: again, the forms fyri, fyre, or fire, which are often used in Edd., are just as wrong, as if one were to say epti, undi, yfi; yet this spelling is found now and then in MSS., as, fyre, Ó. H. (facsimile); fire, Grág. Sb. ii. 288 (also facsimile): the particles í and á are sometimes added, í fur, Fms. iv. 137; í fyrir, passim; á fur, Haustl. 1. [Ulf. faur and faura; A. S. fore and for; Engl. for and fore-; Germ. für and vor; Dan. for; Swed. för; Gr. προ-; Lat. pro, prae.]
    WITH DAT., chiefly without the notion of movement.
    A. LOCAL:
    I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrum, before the doors, at the doors, Nj. 14, Vsp. 53, Hm. 69, Edda 130; niðr f. smiðju-dyrum, Eg. 142:—ahead, úti fyrir búðinni, Nj. 181; kómusk sauðirnir upp á fjallit f. þeim, ahead of them, 27; vóru fyrir honum borin merkin, the banner was borne before him, 274; göra orð fyrir sér, to send word before one, Fms. vii. 207, Hkr. iii. 335 (Ó. H. 201, l. c., frá sér):—also denoting direction, niðri í eldinum f. sér, beneath in the fire before them, Nj. 204; þeir sá f. sér bæ mikinn, they saw before them a great building, i. e. they came to a great house, Eg. 546; öðrum f. sér ( in front) en öðrum á bak sér, Grág. i. 5.
    2. before one, before one’s face, in one’s presence; úhelgaða ek Otkel f. búum, before the neighbours, Nj. 87; lýsi ek f. búum fimm, 218; lýsa e-u ( to proclaim) f. e-m, Ld. 8; hann hermdi boð öll f. Gizuri, Nj. 78; hón nefndisk f. þeim Gunnhildr, told them that her name was G., Fms. i. 8; kæra e-t f. e-m, Ó. H. 60; slíkar fortölur hafði hann f. þeim, Nj. 200; the saying, því læra börnin málið að það er f. þeim haft, bairns learn to speak because it is done before them, i. e. because they hear it; hafa gott (íllt) f. e-m, to give a good (bad) example, e. g. in the presence of children; lifa vel f. Guði, to live well before God, 623. 29; stór ábyrgðar-hluti f. Guði, Nj. 199; sem þeir sjá réttast f. Guði, Grág. i. (pref.); fyrir öllum þeim, Hom. 89; á laun f. öðrum mönnum, hidden from other men, unknown to them, Grág. i. 337, Jb. 378; nú skaltú vera vin minn mikill f. húsfreyju minni, i. e. when you talk to my wife, Nj. 265; fyrir Drottni, before the Lord, Merl. 2. 78.
    3. denoting reception of guests, visitors; hann lét ryðja f. þeim búðina, he had the room cleared for them, for their reception, Nj. 228; Valhöll ryðja fyr vegnu fólki, i. e. to clear Valhalla for slain folk, Em. I; ryðja vígvöll f. vegundum, Nj. 212; ljúka upp f. e-m, to open the door for one, Fms. xi. 323, Stj. 5; rýma pallinn f. þeim, Eg. 304; hann lét göra eld f. þeim, he had a fire made for them, 204; þeir görðu eld. f. sér, Fms. xi. 63; … veizlur þar sem fyrir honum var búit, banquets that were ready for him, Eg. 45.
    II. before one, in one’s way; þar er díki varð f. þeim, Eg. 530; á (fjörðr) varð f. þeim, a river, fjord, was before them, i. e. they came to it, 133, 161; at verða eigi f. liði yðru, 51; maðr sá varð f. Vindum, that man was overtaken by the V., Hkr. iii. 363; þeirra manna er f. honum urðu, Eg. 92.
    2. sitja f. e-m, to lie in wait for one, Ld. 218, Nj. 107; lá f. henni í skóginum, Edda (pref.); sitja f. rekum, to sit watching for wrecks, Eg. 136 (fyrir-sát).
    3. ellipt., menn urðu at gæta sín er f. urðu, Nj. 100; Egill var þar f. í runninum, E. was before (them), lay in ambush, Eg. 378; hafði sá bana er f. varð, who was before (the arrow), i. e. he was hit, Nj. 8.
    4. verða f. e-u, to be hit, taken, suffer from a thing; ef hann verðr f. drepi, if he be struck, Grág. ii. 19; verða f. áverka, to be wounded, suffer injury, Ld. 140; verða f. reiði konungs, to fall into disgrace with the king, Eg. 226; verða f. ósköpum, to become the victim of a spell, spell-bound, Fas. i. 130; sitja f. hvers manns ámæli, to be the object of all men’s blame, Nj. 71; vera eigi f. sönnu hafðr, to be unjustly charged with a thing, to be innocent.
    III. a naut. term, before, off; liggja f. bryggjum, to lie off the pier, Ld. 166; skip fljóta f. strengjum, Sks. 116; þeir lágu f. bænum, they lay off the town, Bs. i. 18; liggja úti f. Jótlands-síðu, off Jutland, Eg. 261; hann druknaði f. Jaðri, off the J., Fms. i. II; þeir kómu at honum f. Sjólandi, off Zealand, x. 394; hafa úti leiðangr f. landi, Hkr. i. 301; f. Humru-minni, off the Humber, Orkn. 338, cp. Km. 3, 8, 9, 13, 19, 21; fyrir Nesjum, off the Ness, Vellekla; fyrir Tungum, Sighvat; fyrir Spáni, off Spain, Orkn. 356.
    IV. before, at the head of, denoting leadership; smalamaðr f. búi föður síns, Ver. 26 (of king David); vera f. liði, to be over the troops, Eg. 292, Nj. 7; vera f. máli, to lead the case, Band. 8; vera forstjóri f. búi, to be steward over the household, Eg. 52; ráða f. landi, ríki, etc., to rule, govern, Ó H. 33, Nj. 5; hverr f. eldinum réði, who was the ringleader of the fire, Eg. 239; ráða f. e-u, to rule, manage a thing, passim: the phrase, sitja f. svörum, to respond on one’s behalf, Ölk. 36, Band. 12; hafa svör f. e-m, to be the chief spokesman, Fms. x. 101, Dipl. v. 26.
    V. special usages; friða f. e-m, to make peace for one, Fms. vii. 16, Bs. i. 65; bæta f. e-m, to make things good for one, Hom. 109; túlka, vera túlkr, flytja (etc.) f. e-m, to plead for one, Fms. iii. 33, Nj. 128,—also spilla f. e-m, to disparage one, Eg. 255; haga, ætla f. e-u, to manage, arrange for one, Ld. 208, Sturl. i. 14, Boll. 356; rífka ráð f. e-m, to better one’s condition, Nj. 21; ráða heiman-fylgju ok tilgjöf f. frændkonu sinni, Js. 58; standa f. manni, to stand before, shield a man, stand between him and his enemy, Eg. 357, Grág. ii. 13; vera skjöldr f. e-m, 655 xxxii. 4; hafa kostnað f. e-u, to have the expences for a thing, Ld. 14; vinna f. e-m, to support one by one’s work, Sks. 251; starfa f. fé sínu, to manage one’s money, Ld. 166; hyggja f. e-u, to take heed for a thing, Nj. 109; hyggja f. sér, Fs. 5; hafa forsjá f. e-m, to provide for one, Ld. 186; sjá f. e-u, to see after, Eg. 118, Landn, 152; sjá þú nokkut ráð f. mér, Nj. 20: ironic. to put at rest, Háv. 40: ellipt., sjá vel f., to provide well for, Nj. 102.
    B. TEMP. ago; fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago; fyrir stundu, a while ago, Nj. 80; fyrir litlu, a little while ago, Fms. i. 76, Ld. 134; fyrir skömmu, a sbort while ago; fyrir löngu, a long while ago, Nj. 260, Fms. i. 50; fyrir öndverðu, from the beginning, Grág. i. 80, ii. 323, 394, Finnb. 342; fyrir þeim, before they were born, Fms. i. 57.
    2. the phrase, vera f. e-u, to forebode; vera f. stórfundum, Nj. 107, 277; þat hygg ek vera munu f. siða-skipti, Fms. xi. 12; þessi draumr mun vera f. kvámu nökkurs manns, vii. 163; dreyma draum f. e-u, 8; fyrir tiðendum, ii. 65:—spá f. e-m, to ‘spae’ before, prophecy to one, Nj. 171.
    C. METAPH.:
    I. before, above; þóttu þeir þar f. öllum ungum mönnum, Dropl. 7; þykkisk hann mjök f. öðrum mönnum, Ld. 38; ver f. hirðmönnum, be first among my herdsmen, Eg. 65; Hálfdan svarti var f. þeim bræðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers, Fms. i. 4; þorgrímr var f. sonum Önundar, Grett. 87; var Haraldr mest f. þeim at virðingu, Fms. i. 47.
    II. denoting help, assistance; haun skal rétta vættið f. þeim, Grág. i. 45 (vide above A. IV and V).
    2. the following seem to be Latinisms, láta lífit f. heilagri Kristni, to give up one’s life for holy Christianity, = Lat. pro, Fms. vii. 172; ganga undir píslir fyrir Guðs nafni, Blas. 38; gjalda önd mína f. önd þinni, Johann. 17; gefa gjöf f. sál sinni ( pro animâ suâ), H. E. i. 466; fyrir mér ok minni sál, Dipl. iv. 8; færa Guði fórnir f. e-m, 656 A; heita f. e-m, biðja f. e-m, to make a vow, pray for one (orare pro), Fms. iii. 48, Bs. i. 70; biðja f. mönnum, to intercede for, 19, Fms. xi. 287: even with a double construction, biðja f. stað sinn (acc., which is vernacular) ok heilagri kirkju (dat., which is a Latinism), x. 127.
    III. denoting disadvantage, harm, suffering; þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest Egil thwart all thy affairs, Eg. 249; únýtir hann þá málit fyrir sér, then he ruins his own case, Grág. i. 36, Dropl. 14, 16; Manverjar rufu safnaðinn f. Þorkatli, the Manxmen broke up the assembly, i. e. forsook Thorkel, Fms. ix. 422; kom upp grátr f. henni, she burst into tears, 477; taka fé f. öðrum, to take another’s money, N. G. L. i. 20; knörr þann er konungr lét taka fyrir Þórólfi, Landn. 56; ef hross verðr tekit f. honum, if a horse of his be taken, Grág. i. 436; hann tók upp fé fyrir öllum, he seized property for them all, Ó. H. 60; e-t ferr ílla f. e-m, a thing turns out ill for one; svá fór f. Ólófu, so it came to pass for O., Vígl. 18; loka dyrr f. e-m, to lock the door in one’s face, Edda 21: þeir hafa eigi þessa menn f. yðr drepit, heldr f. yðrar sakir þessi víg vegit, i. e. they have not harmed you, but rather done you a service in slaying those men, Fbr. 33; tók at eyðask f. henni lausa-fé, her money began to fail, Nj. 29; rak á f. þeim storma ok stríðviðri, they were overtaken by gales and bad weather, Vígl. 27; Víglundr rak út knöttinn f. Jökli, V. drove the ball for J., i. e. so that he had to run after it, 24; sá er skar tygil f. Þóri, he who cut Thor’s line, Bragi; sverð brast f. mér, my sword broke, Korm. 98 (in a verse); brjóta e-t f. e-m, to break a thing for one, Bs. i. 15 (in a verse); Valgarðr braut krossa fyrir Merði ok öll heilög tákn, Nj. 167; árin brotnaði f. honum, his oar broke; allar kýrnar drápust fyrir honum, all his cows died.
    2. denoting difficulty, hindrance; sitja f. sæmd e-s, to sit between oneself and one’s honour, i. e. to hinder one’s doing well, Sturl. 87; mikit göri þér mér f. þessu máli, you make this case sore for me, Eb. 124; þér er mikit f. máli, thy case stands ill, Fms. v. 325; ekki er Guði f. því, it is easy for God to do, 656 B. 9; varð honum lítið f. því, it was a small matter for him, he did it easily, Grett. III; mér er minna f. því, it is easier for me, Am. 60; þykkja mikit f. e-u, to be much grieved for a thing, do it unwillingly, Nj. 77; Icel. also say, þykja fyrir (ellipt.), to feel hurt, be displeased:—ellipt., er þeim lítið fyrir at villa járnburð þenna, it is a small matter for them to spoil this ordeal, Ó. H. 140; sem sér muni lítið f. at veiða Gunnar, Nj. 113; fast mun f. vera, it will be fast-fixed before (one), hard to move, Ld. 154; Ásgrími þótti þungt f., A. thought that things looked sad (heavy), Nj. 185; hann var lengi f., he was long about it, Fms. x. 205; hann var lengi f. ok kvað eigi nei við, he was cross and said not downright no, Þorf. Karl. 388.
    IV. in a causal sense, for, because of, Lat. per, pro; sofa ek né mákat fugls jarmi fyrir, I cannot sleep for the shrill cry of birds, Edda 16 (in a verse); hon undi sér hvergi f. verkjum, she had no rest for pains, Bjarn. 69; fyrir gráti, tárum, = Lat. prae lacrymis; fyrir harmi, for sorrow; f. hlátri, for laughter, as in Engl.; þeir æddust f. einni konu, they went mad for the sake of one woman, Sól. 11; ílla fært f. ísum, scarce passable for ice, Fms. xi. 360; hætt var at sitja útar f. Miðgarðs-ormi, Edda 35; hann var lítt gengr f. sárinu, he could hardly walk for the wound, Fbr. 178; fyrir hræðslu, for fear, Hbl. 26; heptisk vegrinn f. þeim meinvættum sem …, Fs. 4; gáðu þeir eigi f. veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing they took no care to make hay, Landn. 30; fyrir riki konungs, for the king’s power, Eg. 67, 117; fyrir ofríki manna, Grág. i. 68; fyrir hví, for why? Eluc. 4; fyrir hví þeir væri þar, Eg. 375; fyrir því, at …, for that, because, Edda 35, Fms. i. 22, vii. 330, Ld. 104; en fyrir því nú at, now since, Skálda 171; nú fyrir því at, id., 169: the phrase, fyrir sökum, for the sake of, because of, passim; vide sök.
    V. by, by the force of; öxlin gékk ór liði fyrir högginu, the shoulder was disjointed by the force of the stroke, Háv. 52.
    2. denoting contest; falla f. e-m, to fall before one, i. e. fighting against one, Fms. i. 7, iv. 9, x. 196; verða halloki f. e-m, to be overcome in fighting one, Ld. 146; látask f. e-m, to perish by one, Eb. 34; hafa bana f. e-m, to be slain by one, Nj. 43; þeir kváðu fá fúnað hafa f. honum, 263; mæddisk hann f. þeim, he lost his breath in fighting them, Eg. 192; láta ríki f. e-m, to lose the kingdom before another, i. e. so that the latter gains it, 264; láta lausar eignir mínar f. þér, 505; láta hlut sinn f. e-m, Fs. 47; standask f. e-m, to stand one’s ground before one, Edda (pref.); hugðisk hann falla mundu f. sjóninni einni saman, that he would sink before his glance, 28, Hým. 12; halda hlut f. e-m, Ld. 54; halda frið ok frelsi f. várum óvinum, Fms. viii. 219; fara mun ek sem ek hefi áðr ætlað f. þínum draum ( thy dream notwithstanding), Ld. 216; þér farit hvárt er þér vilit f. mér, you go wherever you like for me, so far as I am concerted, Fær. 37; halda vöku f. sér, to keep oneself awake, Fms. i. 216.
    β. with verbs, flýja, hlaupa, renna, stökkva f. e-m, to fly, leap, run before one, i. e. to be pursued, Bs. i. 774, Grág. ii. 359; at hann rynni f. þrælum hans, Ld. 64; fyrir þessum úfriði stökk Þangbrandr til Noregs, 180; skyldi hann ganga ór á f. Hofsmönnum, Landn. 178; ganga f. e-u, to give way before, yield to a thing, Fms. i. 305, x. 292; vægja f. e-m, to yield to one, give way, Eg. 21, 187, Nj. 57, Ld. 234.
    VI. against; verja land f. e-m, Eg. 32; verja landit f. Dönum ok öðrum víkingum, Fms. i. 23; til landvarnar f. víkingum, Eg. 260; landvarnar-maðr f. Norðmönnum, Fms. vi. 295; gæta brúarinnar f. bergrisum, Edda 17; gæt þín vel f. konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men, Eg. 113; góð aðstoð f. tröllum ok dvergum, Bárð. 163; beiða Baldri griða f. allskonar háska, Edda 36; auðskæðr f. höggum, Eg. 770.
    VII. in the sense of being driven before; fyrir straumi, veðri, vindi, before the stream, wind, weather (forstreymis, forvindis), Grág. ii. 384, Fms. vii. 262; halda f. veðri, to stand before the wind, Róm. 211.
    2. rýrt mun verða f. honum smá-mennit, he will have an easy game with the small people, Nj. 94: ellipt., hafði sá bana er f. varð, 8; sprakk f., 16, 91.
    VIII. fyrir sér, of oneself, esp. of physical power; mikill f. sér, strong, powerful; lítill f. sér, weak, feeble, Nj. 20, Ísl. ii. 368, Eg. 192; þér munuð kalla mik lítinn mann f. mér, Edda 33; minnstr f. sér, smallest, weakest, Eg. 123; gildr maðr f. sér, Ísl. ii. 322, Fms. ii. 145; herðimaðr mikiil f. sér, a hardy man, Nj. 270; hvat ert þú f. þér, what kind of fellow art thou? Clem. 33; vera einn f. sér, to be a strange fellow, Grett. 79 new Ed.; Icel. also say, göra mikið (lítið) f. sér, to make oneself big ( little).
    β. sjóða e-t f. sér, to hesitate, saunter, Nj. 154; mæla f. munni, to talk between one’s teeth, to mutter, Orkn. 248, Nj. 249.
    IX. denoting manner or quality; hvítr f. hærum, white with hoary hairs, Fms. vi. 95, Fas. ii. 540; gráir fyrir járnum, grey with steel, of a host in armour, Mag. 5; hjölt hvít f. silfri, a hilt white with silver = richly silvered, Eb. 226.
    X. as adverb or ellipt.,
    1. ahead, in front, = á undan, Lat. prae, opp. to eptir; þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, as this came first, preceded, Nj. 34; at einhverr mundi fara heim fyrir, that some one would go home first (to spy), Eg. 580; Egill fór f., E. went in before, id.; at vér ríðim þegar f. í nótt, 283.
    β. first; hann stefndi f. málinu, en hann mælti eptir, one pronounced the words first, but the other repeated after him, Nj. 35; mun ek þar eptir göra sem þér gerit f., I shall do to you according as you do first, 90:—temp., sjau nóttum f., seven nights before, Grág. ii. 217.
    2. to the fore, at hand, present; þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already to the fore, i. e. before the bride and bridegroom came, Nj. 11; úvíst er at vita hvar úvinir sitja á fleti fyrir, Hm. 1; skal þá lögmaðr þar f. vera, he shall be there present, Js. 3; heima í túni fyrir, Fær. 50; þar vóru fyrir Hildiríðar-synir, Eg. 98; var honum allt kunnigt fyrir, he knew all about the localities, 583; þeim ómögum, sem f. eru, who are there already, i. e. in his charge, Grág. i. 286: of things, föng þau er f. vóru, stores that were to the fore, at hand, Eg. 134.
    3. fore, opp. to ‘back,’ of clothes; slæður settar f. allt gullknöppum, Eg. 516; bak ok fyrir, back and front, = bak ok brjóst, Mar.
    XI. in the phrase, e-m verðr e-t fyrir, a thing is before one, i. e. one takes that and that step, acts so and so in an emergency; nú verðr öðrum þeirra þat f., at hann kveðr, now if the other part alleges, that …, Grág. i. 362; Kolbeini varð ekki f., K. had no resource, i. e. lost his head, Sturl. iii. 285:—the phrase, e-t mælisk vel (ílla) fyrir, a thing is well ( ill) reported of; víg Gunnars spurðisk ok mæltisk ílla fyrir um allar sveitir, Nj. 117, Sturl. ii. 151; mun þat vel f. mælask, people will like it well, Nj. 29, Þórð. 55 new Ed.; ílla mun þat f. mælask at ganga á sættir við frændr sína, Ld. 238; ok er lokit var, mæltisk kvæðit vel f., the people praised the poem, Fms. vii. 113.
    XII. in special senses, either as prep. or adv. (vide A. V. above); segja leið f. skipi, to pilot a ship, Eg. 359; segja f. skipi, to say a prayer for a new ship or for any ship going to sea, Bs. i. 774, Fms. x. 480; mæla f. e-u, to dictate, Grág. ii. 266; mæla f. minni, to bring out a toast, vide minni; mæla f. sætt, i. 90; skipa, koma e-u f., to arrange, put right; ætla f. e-u, to make allowance for; trúa e-m f. e-u, to entrust one with; það fer mikið f. e-u (impers.), it is of great compass, bulky; hafa f. e-u, to have trouble with a thing; leita f. sér, to enquire; biðjask f., to say one’s prayers, vide biðja; mæla fyrir, segja f., etc., to order, Nj. 103, Js. 3: of a spell or solemn speaking, hann mælti svá f., at …, Landn. 34; spyrjask f., to enquire, Hkr. ii. 333; búask f., to prepare, make arrangement, Landn. 35, Sks. 551; skipask f., to draw up, Nj. 197; leggjask f., to lie down in despair, Bs. i. 194; spá fyrir, to ‘spae’ before, foretell; þeir menn er spá f. úorðna hluti, Fms. i. 96; segja f., to foretell, 76, Bb. 332; Njáll hefir ok sagt f. um æfi hans, Nj. 102; vita e-t f., to ‘wit’ beforehand, know the future, 98; sjá e-t f., to foresee, 162; ef þat er ætlat f., fore-ordained, id.
    WITH ACC., mostly with the notion of movement.
    A. LOCAL:
    I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrrin, Nj. 198; láta síga brýnn f. brár, Hkv. Hjörv. 19; halda f. augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes, Nj. 132; leggja sverði fyrir brjóst e-m, to thrust a sword into his breast, 162, Fs. 39.
    2. before one, before a court; stefna e-m f. dómstól, Fms. xi. 444; ganga, koma f. e-n, to go, come before one, Fms. i. 15, Eg. 426, Nj. 6, 129, passim; fyrir augu e-s, before one’s eyes, Stj. 611.
    3. before, so as to shield; hann kom skildinum f. sik, he put the shield before him, Nj. 97, 115; halda skildi f. e-n, a duelling term, since the seconder had to hold one’s shield, Ísl. ii. 257.
    4. joined to adverbs such as fram, aptr, út, inn, ofan, niðr, austr, vestr, suðr, norðr, all denoting direction; fram f., forward; aptr f., backward, etc.; hann reiddi öxina fram f. sik, a stroke forward with the axe, Fms. vii. 91; hann hljóp eigi skemra aptr en fram fyrir sik, Nj. 29; þótti honum hann skjóta brandinum austr til fjallanna f. sik, 195; komask út f. dyrr, to go outside the door, Eg. 206:—draga ofan f. brekku, to drag over the hill, Ld. 220; hrinda f. mel ofan, to thrust one over the gravel bank, Eg. 748; hlaupa f. björg, to leap over a precipice, Eb. 62, Landn. 36; elta e-n f. björg, Grág. ii. 34; hlaupa (kasta) f. borð, to leap ( throw) overboard, Fms. i. 178, Hkr. iii. 391, Ld. 226; síga ( to be hauled) niðr f. borgar-vegg, 656 C. 13, Fms. ix. 3; hlaupa niðr f. stafn, Eg. 142; niðr f. skaflinn, Dropl. 25; fyrir brekku, Orkn. 450, Glúm. 395 (in a verse).
    II. in one’s way, crossing one’s way; þeir stefndu f. þá, Fms. ix. 475; ríða á leið f. þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them, Boll. 348; hlaupa ofan f. þá, Nj. 153; vóru allt komin f. hann bréf, letters were come before him, in his way, Fms. vii. 207; þeir felldu brota f. hann, viz. they felled trees before him, so as to stop him, viii. 60, ix. 357; leggja bann f. skip, to lay an embargo on a ship, Ld. 166.
    III. round, off a point; fyrir nesit, Nj. 44; út f. Holm, out past the Holm, Fms. vii. 356: esp. as a naut. term, off a point on the shore, sigla f. England, Norðyrnbraland, Þrasnes, Spán, to sail by the coast of, stand off England, Northumberland, … Spain, Orkn. 338, 340, 342, 354; fyrir Yrjar, Fms. vii. (in a verse); fyrir Siggju, Aumar, Lista, Edda 91 (in a verse); er hann kom f. Elfina, when be came off the Gotha, Eg. 80; leggja land f. skut, to lay the land clear of the stern, i. e. to pass it, Edda l. c.; göra frið f. land sitt, to pacify the land from one end to another, Ld. 28; fyrir uppsprettu árinnar, to come to ( round) the sources of the river, Fms. iii. 183; fyrir garðs-enda, Grág. ii. 263; girða f. nes, to make a wall across the ness, block it up, cp. Lat. praesepire, praemunire, etc., Grág. ii. 263; so also binda f. op, poka, Lat. praeligare, praestringere; hlaða f. gat, holu, to stop a hole, opening; greri f. stúfinn, the stump (of the arm or leg) was healed, closed, Nj. 275; skjóta slagbrandi f. dyrr, to shoot a bolt before the door, to bar it, Dropl. 29; láta loku (lás) f. hurð, to lock a door, Gísl. 28; setja innsigli f. bréf, to set a seal to a letter, Dipl. i. 3: ellipt., setr hón þar lás fyrir, Ld. 42, Bs. i. 512.
    2. along, all along; f. endilanga Danmörk, f. endilangan Noreg, all along Denmark, Norway, from one end to the other, Fms. iv. 319, xi. 91, Grett. 97:—öx álnar f. munn, an axe with an ell-long edge, Ld. 276; draga ör f. ödd, to draw the arrow past the point, an archer’s term, Fms. ii. 321.
    IV. with verbs, fyrir ván komit, one is come past hope, all hope is gone, Sturl. i. 44, Hrafn. 13, Fms. ii. 131; taka f. munn e-m, to stop one’s mouth; taka f. háls, kverkar, e-m, to seize one by the throat, etc.; taka mál f. munn e-m, ‘verba alicujus praeripere,’ to take the word out of one’s mouth, xi. 12; taka f. hendr e-m, to seize one’s hands, stop one in doing a thing, Eb. 124; mod., taka fram f. hendrnar á e-m.
    B. TEMP.: fyrir dag, before day, Eg. 80; f. miðjan dag, Ld. 14; f. sól, before sunrise, 268; f. sólar-lag, before sunset; f. miðjan aptan, Nj. 192; f. náttmál, 197; f. óttu, Sighvat; f. þinglausnir, Ölk. 37; f. Jól, Nj. 269; f. fardaga, Grág. ii. 341; viku f. sumar, 244; f. mitt sumar, Nj. 138; litlu f. vetr, Eg. 159; f. vetrnætr, Grág. ii. 217; f. e-s minni, before one’s memory, Íb. 16.
    C. METAPH.:
    I. above, before; hann hafdi mest fyrir aðra konunga hraustleikinn, Fms. x. 372.
    II. for, on behalf of; vil ek bjóða at fara f. þik, I will go for thee, in thy stead, Nj. 77; ganga í skuld f. e-n, Grág. i. 283; Egill drakk … ok svá f. Ölvi, Eg. 210; kaupa e-t f. e-n, Nj. 157; gjalda gjöld f. e-n, Grág. i. 173; verja, sækja, sakir f. e-n, Eg. 504; hvárr f. sik, each for oneself, Dipl. v. 26; sættisk á öll mál f. Björn, Nj. 266; tók sættir f. Björn, Eg. 168; svara f. e-t, Fms. xi. 444; hafa til varnir f. sik, láta lýrit, lög-vörn koma f.; færa vörn f. sik, etc.; verja, sækja sakir f. sik, and many similar law phrases, Grág. passim; biðja konu f. e-n, to woo a lady for another, Fms. x. 44; fyrir mik, on my behalf, for my part, Gs. 16; lögvörn f. mál, a lawful defence for a case, Nj. 111; hafa til varnar f. sök, to defend a case, Grág. i. 61; halda skiladómi f. e-t, Dipl. iv. 8; festa lög f. e-t, vide festa.
    III. in a distributive sense; penning f. mann, a penny per man, K. Þ. K. 88; fyrir nef hvert, per nose = per head, Lv. 89, Fms. i. 153, Ó. H. 141; hve f. marga menn, for how many men, Grág. i. 296; fyrir hverja stiku, for each yard, 497.
    IV. for, for the benefit of; brjóta brauð f. hungraða, Hom. 75; þeir skáru f. þá melinn, they cut the straw for them (the horses), Nj. 265; leggja kostnað f. e-n, to defray one’s costs, Grág. i. 341.
    V. for, instead of; hann setti sik f. Guð, Edda (pref.); hafa e-n f. Guð (Lat. pro Deo), Stj. 73, Barl. 131; geta, fá, kveðja mann f. sik, to get a man as one’s delegate or substitute, Grág. i. 48 passim; þeir höfðu vargstakka f. brynjur, Fs. 17; manna-höfuð vóru f. kljána, Nj. 275; gagl f. gás ok grís f. gamalt svín, Ó. H. 86; rif stór f. hlunna, Háv. 48; buðkr er f. húslker er hafðr, Vm. 171; auga f. auga, tönn f. tönn, Exod. xxi. 24; skell f. skillinga, Þkv. 32.
    VI. because of, for; vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit, Nj. 92, Fms. v. 162; eigi f. sakleysi, not without ground, i. 302; fyrir hvat (why, for what) stefndi Gunnarr þeim til úhelgi? Nj. 101; ok urðu f. þat sekir, Landn. 323; hafa ámæli f. e-t, Nj. 65, passim.
    2. in a good sense, for one’s sake, for one; fyrir þín orð, for thy words, intercession, Ísl. ii. 217; vil ek göra f. þín orð, Ld. 158, Nj. 88; fyrir sína vinsæld, by his popularity, Fms. i. 259: the phrase, fyrir e-s sök, for one’s sake, vide sök: in swearing, a Latinism, fyrir trú mína, by my faith! (so in Old Engl. ‘fore God), Karl. 241; fyrir þitt líf, Stj. 514; ek særi þik f. alla krapta Krists ok manndóm þinn, Nj. 176. VII. for, at, denoting value, price; fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks, Eg. 714; er sik leysti út f. þrjú hundruð marka, Fms. ix. 421; ganga f. hundrað, to pass or go for a hundred, D. I. i. 316:—also of the thing bought, þú skalt reiða f. hana þrjár merkr, thou shall pay for her three marks, Ld. 30; fyrir þik skulu koma mannhefndir, Nj. 57; bætr f. víg, Ísl. ii. 274; bætr f. mann, Eg. 259, passim; fyrir áverka Þorgeirs kom legorðs-sökin, Nj. 101:—so in the phrase, fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost; fyrir öngan mun, by no means, Fms. i. 9, 157, Gþl. 531:—hafði hverr þeirra mann f. sik, eða tvá …, each slew a man or more for himself, i. e. they sold their lives dearly, Ó. H. 217.
    2. ellipt., í staðinn f., instead of, Grág. i. 61; hér vil ek bjóða f. góð boð, Nj. 77; taka umbun f., Fms. vii. 161; svara slíku f. sem …, Boll. 350; þér skulut öngu f. týna nema lífinu, you shall lose nothing less than your head, Nj. 7.
    VIII. by means of, by, through; fyrir þat sama orð, Stj.; fyrir sína náttúru, Fms. v. 162; fyrir messu-serkinn, iii. 168; fyrir þinn krapt ok frelsis-hönd, Pass. 19. 12; svikin f. orminn, by the serpent, Al. 63,—this use of fyrir seems to be a Latinism, but is very freq. in eccl. writings, esp. after the Reformation, N. T., Pass., Vídal.; fyrir munn Davíðs, through the mouth of David, etc.:—in good old historical writings such instances are few; þeir hlutuðu f. kast ( by dice), Sturl. ii. 159.
    IX. in spite of, against; fyrir vilja sinn, N. G. L. i. 151; fyrir vitorð eðr vilja e-s, against one’s will or knowledge, Grág. ii. 348; kvángask (giptask) f. ráð e-s, i. 177, 178, Þiðr. 190; nú fara menn f. bann ( in spite of an embargo) landa á milli, Gþl. 517; hann gaf henni líf f. framkvæmd farar, i. e. although she had not fulfilled her journey ( her vow), Fms. v. 223; fyrir várt lof, vi. 220; fyrir allt þat, in spite of all that, Grett. 80 new Ed.; fyrir ráð fram, heedlessly; fyrir lög fram, vide fram.
    X. denoting capacity, in the same sense as ‘at,’ C. II, p. 27, col. 1; scarcely found in old writers (who use ‘at’), but freq. in mod. usage, thus, eigi e-n f. vin, to have one for a friend, in old writers ‘at vin;’ hafa e-n f. fífl, fól, to make sport of one.
    2. in old writers some phrases come near to this, e. g. vita f. vist, to know for certain, Dipl. i. 3; vita f. full sannindi, id., ii. 16; hafa f. satt, to take for sooth, believe, Nj. 135; koma f. eitt, to come ( turn) all to one, Lv. 11, Nj. 91, Fms. i. 208; koma f. ekki, to come to naught, be of no avail, Ísl. ii. 215; fyrir hitt mun ganga, it will turn the other way, Nj. 93; fyrir hann er einskis örvænt orðs né verks, from him everything may be expected, Ísl. ii. 326; hafa e-s víti f. varnað, to have another’s faults for warning, Sól. 19.
    XI. joined with adverbs ending in -an, fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan, innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan, either with a following acc. denoting. direction, thus, fyrir austan, sunnan … fjall, east, south of the fell, i. e. on the eastern, southern side; fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge; fyrir útan fjall = Lat. ultra; fyrir innan fjall = Lat. infra; fyrir handan á, beyond the river; fyrir innan garð, inside the yard; fyrir ofan garð, above, beyond the yard, etc.; vide these adverbs:—used adverb., fyrir sunnan, in the south; fyrir vestan, in the west; fyrir norðan, in the north; fyrir austan, in the east,—current phrases in Icel. to mark the quarters of the country, cp. the ditty in Esp. Árb. year 1530; but not freq. in old writers, who simply say, norðr, suðr …, cp. Kristni S. ch. 1: absol. and adverb., fyrir ofan, uppermost; fyrir handan, on the other side:—fyrir útan e-t, except, save, Anal. 98, Vkv. 8; fyrir fram, vide fram.
    ☞ For- and fyrir- as prefixes, vide pp. 163–167 and below:
    I. fore-, for-, meaning before, above, in the widest sense, local, temp., and metaph. furthering or the like, for-dyri, for-nes, for-ellri, for-beini, etc.
    β. before, down, for-brekkis, -bergis, -streymis, -vindis, -viðris, etc.
    2. in an intens. sense = before others, very, but not freq.; for-dyld, -góðr, -hagr, -hraustr, -kostuligr, -kuðr, -lítill, -ljótr, -prís, -ríkr, -snjallr.
    II. (cp. fyrir, acc., C. IX), in a neg. or priv. sense; a few words occur even in the earliest poems, laws, and writers, e. g. for-að, -átta, -dæða, -nám, -næmi, -sending, -sköp, -verk, -veðja, -viða, -vitni, -ynja, -yrtir; those words at least seem to be original and vernacular: at a later time more words of the same kind crept in:
    1. as early as writers of the 13th and 14th centuries, e. g. for-boð, -bænir, -djarfa, -dæma (fyrir-dæma), -taka (fyrir-taka), -þóttr; fyrir-bjóða, -fara, -göra, -koma, -kunna, -líta, -muna, -mæla, -vega, -verða.
    2. introduced in some words at the time of the Reformation through Luther’s Bible and German hymns, and still later in many more through Danish, e. g. for-brjóta, -drífa, -láta, -líkast, -merkja, -nema, -sorga, -sóma, -standa, -svara, -þénusta, and several others; many of these, however, are not truly naturalised, being chiefly used in eccl. writings:—it is curious that if the pronoun be placed after the verb (which is the vernacular use in Icel.) the sense is in many cases reversed; thus, fyrir-koma, to destroy, but koma e-u fyrir can only mean to arrange; so also fyrir-mæla, to curse, and mæla fyrir, to speak for; for-bænir, but biðja fyrir e-m, etc.; in the latter case the sense is good and positive, in the former bad and negative; this seems to prove clearly that these compds are due to foreign influence.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > FYRIR

  • 13 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

  • 14 cercano

    adj.
    1 close, immediate, near, nearby.
    2 close, dear.
    * * *
    1 (inmediato) near, close
    2 (vecino) nearby, neighbouring (US neighboring)
    3 (pariente) close
    \
    el Cercano Oriente the Near East
    * * *
    (f. - cercana)
    adj.
    close, near, nearby
    * * *
    ADJ
    1) [lugar] nearby

    • cercano a — close to, near, near to

    2) [amigo, pariente] close

    • cercano a — close to

    3) [en el tiempo]

    ahora, cuando está cercano el primer aniversario de su muerte — now, as the first anniversary of her death approaches

    * * *
    - na adjetivo
    1)
    a) ( en el espacio) nearby, neighboring*

    cercano a algo — near something, close to something

    b) ( en el tiempo) close, near
    2) <pariente/amigo> close
    * * *
    = adjacent, adjoining, close [closer -comp., closest -sup.], immediate, nearby [near-by], neighbouring [neighboring, -USA], near at hand, close at hand, in sight, over the horizon, on the horizon, close-by, proximate, near [nearer -comp., nearest -sup.], within sight, within range.
    Ex. Before him there are the two items to be joined, projected onto adjacent viewing positions.
    Ex. The library is poorly sited outside the shopping centre and on the brow of a hill, and faces competition from adjoining libraries.
    Ex. Superior cataloguing may result, since more consistency and closer adherence to standard codes are likely to emerge with cataloguers who spend all of their time cataloguing, than with a librarian who tackles cataloguing as one of various professional tasks.
    Ex. This system offers immediate access when required by users and staff, preferably several users at the same time.
    Ex. An earlier leakage had prompted library staff to make arrangements with a nearby firm of book conservation specialists in the event of a further disaster.
    Ex. The philosophical, brooding Hippopotamians have suffered many attacks by the neighbouring Crocs who are well known for their purposefulness and efficiency.
    Ex. The firm does not have to be near at hand, but there must be plenty of cooperation and consultation as to selection of stock.
    Ex. Material needed daily should be stored close at hand.
    Ex. The trend is definitely towards the electronic submission, but the point where this method will entirely supplant the others is not yet in sight.
    Ex. This article surveys the changes which have already occurred and those which are just over the horizon.
    Ex. The author concludes with descriptions of advances in the technology currently on the horizon.
    Ex. The second phase of the study entailed interviewing at close-by universities in the Midwest.
    Ex. For example, Literature and Language should be proximate, as should Commerce and Economics and Business, Psychology and Medicine, and so on.
    Ex. He was a loner himself, a small-town country boy who spent most of his time wandering about the hills and fields near his home.
    Ex. As the major US telecommunications service providers install fibre optic cable, the availability of interactive video is within sight.
    Ex. 77% of the world's population lives within range of a mobile network.
    ----
    * cercano a = approaching, in close proximity to.
    * Cercano Oriente = Near East.
    * cercano uno del otro = in close proximity.
    * del Cercano Oriente = Near-Eastern.
    * en el futuro cercano = in the foreseeable future.
    * en un futuro más o menos cercano = in the near future.
    * en un futuro muy cercano = in the very near future.
    * en un período más o menos cercano = in the near future.
    * experiencia cercana a la muerte = near death experience.
    * futuro cercano, el = near future, the.
    * lado más cercano, el = near side, the.
    * lo más cercano a = the nearest thing to.
    * pariente cercano = close relation.
    * redondear al número entero más cercano = round up to + the nearest whole number.
    * * *
    - na adjetivo
    1)
    a) ( en el espacio) nearby, neighboring*

    cercano a algo — near something, close to something

    b) ( en el tiempo) close, near
    2) <pariente/amigo> close
    * * *
    = adjacent, adjoining, close [closer -comp., closest -sup.], immediate, nearby [near-by], neighbouring [neighboring, -USA], near at hand, close at hand, in sight, over the horizon, on the horizon, close-by, proximate, near [nearer -comp., nearest -sup.], within sight, within range.

    Ex: Before him there are the two items to be joined, projected onto adjacent viewing positions.

    Ex: The library is poorly sited outside the shopping centre and on the brow of a hill, and faces competition from adjoining libraries.
    Ex: Superior cataloguing may result, since more consistency and closer adherence to standard codes are likely to emerge with cataloguers who spend all of their time cataloguing, than with a librarian who tackles cataloguing as one of various professional tasks.
    Ex: This system offers immediate access when required by users and staff, preferably several users at the same time.
    Ex: An earlier leakage had prompted library staff to make arrangements with a nearby firm of book conservation specialists in the event of a further disaster.
    Ex: The philosophical, brooding Hippopotamians have suffered many attacks by the neighbouring Crocs who are well known for their purposefulness and efficiency.
    Ex: The firm does not have to be near at hand, but there must be plenty of cooperation and consultation as to selection of stock.
    Ex: Material needed daily should be stored close at hand.
    Ex: The trend is definitely towards the electronic submission, but the point where this method will entirely supplant the others is not yet in sight.
    Ex: This article surveys the changes which have already occurred and those which are just over the horizon.
    Ex: The author concludes with descriptions of advances in the technology currently on the horizon.
    Ex: The second phase of the study entailed interviewing at close-by universities in the Midwest.
    Ex: For example, Literature and Language should be proximate, as should Commerce and Economics and Business, Psychology and Medicine, and so on.
    Ex: He was a loner himself, a small-town country boy who spent most of his time wandering about the hills and fields near his home.
    Ex: As the major US telecommunications service providers install fibre optic cable, the availability of interactive video is within sight.
    Ex: 77% of the world's population lives within range of a mobile network.
    * cercano a = approaching, in close proximity to.
    * Cercano Oriente = Near East.
    * cercano uno del otro = in close proximity.
    * del Cercano Oriente = Near-Eastern.
    * en el futuro cercano = in the foreseeable future.
    * en un futuro más o menos cercano = in the near future.
    * en un futuro muy cercano = in the very near future.
    * en un período más o menos cercano = in the near future.
    * experiencia cercana a la muerte = near death experience.
    * futuro cercano, el = near future, the.
    * lado más cercano, el = near side, the.
    * lo más cercano a = the nearest thing to.
    * pariente cercano = close relation.
    * redondear al número entero más cercano = round up to + the nearest whole number.

    * * *
    cercano -na
    A
    1 (en el espacio) nearby, neighboring* cercano A algo near sth, close TO sth
    los pueblos cercanos a Durango the villages in the vicinity of o close to o near Durango
    una suma cercana al millón an amount close to o close on a million
    2 (en el tiempo) close, near
    cercano A algo close TO sth
    se sentía cercano a su fin he felt the end was near o close, he felt he was close to the end
    Compuesto:
    el Cercano Oriente the Near East
    B ‹pariente/amigo› close
    * * *

     

    cercano
    ◊ -na adjetivo

    1

    cercano a algo near sth, close to sth;



    cercano a algo close to sth
    2 ‹pariente/amigo› close
    cercano,-a adjetivo
    1 close, nearby
    un pueblo cercano, a nearby village
    2 (pariente) close
    3 Cercano Oriente, Near East
    ' cercano' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    cercana
    - ir
    - próxima
    - próximo
    - vecina
    - vecino
    - futuro
    English:
    close
    - early
    - immediate
    - near
    - nearby
    - nursery
    - offshore
    - proximate
    - next
    * * *
    cercano, -a adj
    1. [en el espacio] nearby;
    cercano a near, close to
    el Cercano Oriente the Near East
    2. [en el tiempo] near;
    cercano a near, close to
    3. [con cifras] close;
    pagaron un precio cercano a los 2 millones they paid close to o nearly 2 million
    4. [pariente, amigo, colaborador] close;
    según fuentes cercanas a la familia real,… according to sources close to the royal family,…
    5. [en contenido]
    una obra más cercana a la tragedia que a la comedia a play that is closer to tragedy than to comedy
    * * *
    adj nearby;
    cercano a close to, near to
    * * *
    cercano, -na adj
    : near, close
    * * *
    cercano adj
    1. (en distancia) near / nearby
    2. (una persona) close

    Spanish-English dictionary > cercano

  • 15 unido

    adj.
    united, joined, joint, accrete.
    past part.
    past participle of spanish verb: unir.
    * * *
    1→ link=unir unir
    1 (junto) united
    2 (avenido) attached
    * * *
    (f. - unida)
    adj.
    joined, united
    * * *
    ADJ [amigos, familiares] close

    una familia muy unida — a very close o very close-knit family

    mantenerse unidos — to keep together, stick together, stay together

    * * *
    - da adjetivo
    a) <familia/amigos> close
    b) ( sobre un tema) united
    * * *
    Ex. For future metacatalogues to be successful, methods must be developed to use all existing organizational tools by layering, exchanging and translating data within a loosely coupled organizational system.
    ----
    * con sede en el Reino Unido = UK-based.
    * Consejo de Seguridad de las Naciones Unidas = United Nations Security Council.
    * Emiratos †rabes Unidos, los = United Arab Emirates, the.
    * Estados Unidos, los = US, US, the [U.S.], United States, the.
    * Guerra entre España y los Estados Unidos, la = Spanish-American War, the.
    * ir a unido a = come with + the territory (of).
    * ir unido a = go with + the territory (of).
    * LA (Asociación de Bibliotecarios del Reino Unido) = LA (Library Association).
    * mantenerse unidos = stick together.
    * MARC del Reino Unido = UKMARC.
    * muy unido = close-knit, tight-knit, closely knit, tightly knit.
    * permanecer unidos = stick together.
    * poco unido = loosely knit.
    * región central de los Estados Unidos, la = American midwest, the.
    * Reino Unido, el = UK, the (United Kingdom, the).
    * * *
    - da adjetivo
    a) <familia/amigos> close
    b) ( sobre un tema) united
    * * *

    Ex: For future metacatalogues to be successful, methods must be developed to use all existing organizational tools by layering, exchanging and translating data within a loosely coupled organizational system.

    * con sede en el Reino Unido = UK-based.
    * Consejo de Seguridad de las Naciones Unidas = United Nations Security Council.
    * Emiratos †rabes Unidos, los = United Arab Emirates, the.
    * Estados Unidos, los = US, US, the [U.S.], United States, the.
    * Guerra entre España y los Estados Unidos, la = Spanish-American War, the.
    * ir a unido a = come with + the territory (of).
    * ir unido a = go with + the territory (of).
    * LA (Asociación de Bibliotecarios del Reino Unido) = LA (Library Association).
    * mantenerse unidos = stick together.
    * MARC del Reino Unido = UKMARC.
    * muy unido = close-knit, tight-knit, closely knit, tightly knit.
    * permanecer unidos = stick together.
    * poco unido = loosely knit.
    * región central de los Estados Unidos, la = American midwest, the.
    * Reino Unido, el = UK, the (United Kingdom, the).

    * * *
    unido -da
    1 ‹familiares/amigos› close
    una pareja muy unida a very close couple
    una familia muy unida a close-knit o close family
    estamos unidos sobre este punto we are united on this issue
    * * *

    Del verbo unir: ( conjugate unir)

    unido es:

    el participio

    Multiple Entries:
    unido    
    unir
    unido
    ◊ -da adjetivo

    a) ‹familia/amigos› close


    unir ( conjugate unir) verbo transitivo
    1
    a) ‹ cables› to join;

    (con cola, pegamento) to stick … together;
    ‹ esfuerzos› to combine
    b) [sentimientos/intereses] to unite

    c) ‹características/cualidades/estilos› to combine;

    unido algo a algo to combine sth with sth
    2 ( comunicar) ‹ lugares› to link
    3 ( fusionar) ‹empresas/organizaciones› to merge
    unirse verbo pronominal
    1 ( aliarse) [personas/colectividades] to join together;

    2 ( juntarse) [ caminos] to converge, meet
    3 ( fusionarse) [empresas/organizaciones] to merge
    unido,-a adjetivo
    1 (federado, asociado, etc) united
    2 (vinculado sentimentalmente) close, attached: nos sentimos muy unidos a él, we are very close to him
    3 (pegado, comunicado) linked, jointed
    unir verbo transitivo
    1 (cables, conexiones) to join, unite
    2 (esfuerzos, intereses) to join
    (asociar, fusionar) unieron sus empresas, they merged their companies
    3 (comunicar) to link: ese camino une las dos aldeas, that path links the two villages
    ' unido' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    bar
    - chalet
    - comunicar
    - lata
    - unida
    - cena
    - cenar
    - comida
    - junto
    - Reino Unido
    English:
    back out
    - close-knit
    - connected
    - crisps
    - lady
    - marmalade
    - mean
    - potato chips
    - Secretary of State
    - UK
    - Union Jack
    - united
    - United Kingdom
    - allied
    - close
    - couple
    - devoted
    - hold
    - open
    - union
    * * *
    unido, -a adj
    [junto, reunido] united; [familia, amigos] close;
    todos los miembros de la familia están muy unidos all the members of the family are very close
    * * *
    adj united;
    una familia unida a close-knit family;
    estar muy unidos be very close
    * * *
    unido, -da adj
    1) : joined, united
    2) : close
    unos amigos muy unidos: very close friends
    * * *
    unido adj close

    Spanish-English dictionary > unido

  • 16 Gibson, R.O.

    [br]
    fl. 1920s–30s
    [br]
    English chemist who, with E.O.Fawcett, discovered polythene.
    [br]
    Dr Gibson's work towards the discovery of polythene had its origin in a visit in 1925 to Dr A. Michels of Amsterdam University; the latter had made major advances in techniques for studying chemical reactions at very high pressures. After working with Michels for a time, in 1926 Gibson joined Brunner Mond, one of the companies that went on to form the chemical giant Imperial Chemical Industries (ICI). The company supported research into fundamental chemical research that had no immediate commercial application, including the field being cultivated by Michels and Gibson. In 1933 Gibson was joined by another ICI chemist, E.O.Fawcett, who had worked with W.H. Carothers in the USA on polymer chemistry. They were asked to study the effects of high pressure on various reaction systems, including a mixture of benzaldehyde and ethylene. Gibson's notebook for 27 March that year records that after a loss of pressure during which the benzaldehyde was blown out of the reaction tube, a waxy solid was observed in the tube. This is generally recognized as the first recorded observation of polythene. By the following June they had shown that the white, waxy solid was a fairly high molecular weight polymer of ethylene formed at a temperature of 443°K and a pressure of 2,000 bar. However, only small amounts of the material were produced and its significance was not immediately recognized. It was not until two years later that W.P.Perrin and others, also ICI chemists, restarted work on the polymer. They showed that it could be moulded, drawn into threads and cast into tough films. It was a good electrical insulator and almost inert chemically. A British patent for producing polythene was taken out in 1936, and after further development work a production plant began operating in September 1939, just as the Second World War was breaking out. Polythene had arrived in time to make a major contribution to the war effort, for it had the insulating properties required for newly developing work on radar. When peacetime uses became possible, polythene production surged ahead and became the major industry it is today, with a myriad uses in industry and in everyday life.
    [br]
    Bibliography
    1964, The Discovery of Polythene, Royal Institute of Chemistry Lecture Series 1, London.
    LRD

    Biographical history of technology > Gibson, R.O.

  • 17 γίνομαι

    γίνομαι (in the form γίγνομαι [s. below] Hom.+; as γίν. since Aristot.+; and s. Kühner-Bl. II p. 391; Schwyzer I 215; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 126; Mayser p. 165 and lit. there). Impf. ἐγινόμην; fut. γενήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην, 3 sg. opt. γένοιτο; very rare v.l. (B-D-F §81, 3) γενάμενος (GJs 6:1; 16;1; 25:1 [s. deStrycker 249]; also found in Ps.-Callisth. 1, 20, 1; 1, 41, 11; ApcEsdr 1:3 p. 24, 7 Tdf.; Mel., P. 49, 346 [Bodm.]). Pass.: fut. ptc. τῶν γενηθησομένων (Eccl 1:11 v.l.); 1 aor. ἐγενήθην (Doric, H. Gk.; Phryn. 108 Lob.; pap fr. III B.C., Mayser I/22 ’38, 157f [w. lit.]; ins [Schweizer 181; Nachmanson 168; Thieme 13]; LXX), impv. γενηθήτω; pf. γεγένημαι (Meisterhans3-Schw.: Att. ins since 376 B.C.; Mayser 391) uncontested use in NT only J 2:9; GJs 24:3 (γεγένν-pap); apolog. On pf. γέγονα s. Meisterhans3-Schw.: since 464 B.C.; Mayser 372; on the aoristic use of γέγονα s. Mlt. 145f; 238; 239; PChantraine, Histoire du parfait grec 1927, 233–45; 3 pl. γέγοναν Ro 16:7 (v.l. γεγόνασιν) and Rv 21:6; s. KBuresch, Γέγοναν: RhM 46, 1891, 193ff; Mlt. 52 n.; ptc. γεγονώς; plpf. 3 sg. ἐγεγόνει (1 Macc. 4:27; 2 Macc. 13:17; J 6:17; Just.), without augment γεγόνει (Ac 4:22; v.l. ἐγεγόνει), s. B-D-F §78; Mlt-H. 190. On the variation γίνομαι and γίγνομαι s. W-S. §5, 31; B-D-F §34, 4; Mlt-H. 108. A verb with numerous nuances relating to being and manner of being. Its contrast to the more static term εἰμί can be seen in Kaibel 595, 5 οὐκ ἤμην καὶ ἐγενόμην=I was not and then I came to be (cp. Ath. 4, 2 in 3 below).
    ① to come into being through process of birth or natural production, be born, be produced (SIG 1168, 6; Epict. 2, 17, 8; Wsd 7:3; Sir 44:9; Just., A I, 13, 3; Tat. 26, 2) J 8:58; w. ἔκ τινος foll. (Diod S 3, 64, 1; Appian, Basil. 5 §1; Parthenius 1, 4; Athen. 13, 37 p. 576c ἐξ ἑταίρας; PPetr III, 2, 20; PFlor 382, 38 ὁ ἐξ ἐμοῦ γενόμενος υἱός; 1 Esdr 4:16; Tob 8:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 216) Ro 1:3; Gal 4:4 (cp. 1QS 11:21). Also of plants 1 Cor 15:37. Of fruits ἔκ τινος be produced by a tree Mt 21:19 (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 13 ὁ ἐκ τ. χώρας γιγνόμενος σῖτος). W. ἀπό τινος foll. Ox 1081 (SJCh), 11 γε̣[ινόμε]νον, 14 γέγ[ονος], 14f γε[ι]νομεν[ον], 19 γέγονος.
    ② to come into existence, be made, be created, be manufactured, be performed
    ⓐ gener. ὸ̔ γέγονεν J 1:3c (s. ref. to Vawter, below); w. διά τινος vs. 3a (MTeschendorf, D. Schöpfungsged. im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 337–72). W. χωρίς τινος vs. 3b (IAndrosIsis, Cyrene 15 [103 A.D.] Ἐμοῦ δὲ χωρὶς γείνετʼ οὐδὲν πώποτε; Cleanthes, Hymn to Zeus 15 [Stoic. I 537=Coll. Alex. no. 1 p. 227] οὐδέ τι γίγνεται ἔργον σοῦ δίχα; note the related style 1QH 1:20; on the syntax of J 1:3f see BVawter, CBQ 25, ’63, 401–6, who favors a full stop after οὐδὲ ἕν, s. εἷς 2b and lit. cited there on J 1:3). W. ἔκ τινος Hb 11:3. Of cult images διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι made w. hands Ac 19:26 (cp. PRyl 231, 3 [40 A.D.] τοὺς ἄρτους γενέσθαι). Of miracles: be done, take place (Tob 11:15; Wsd 19:13 v.l. Swete) Mt 11:20f, 23; Lk 10:13; Ac 8:13. ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο on whom this miracle had been performed 4:22. W. mention of the author διά τινος (cp. 4 Macc 17:11) 2:43; 4:16, 30; 12:9; 24:2. διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Mk 6:2; Ac 14:3. ὑπό τινος (Herodian 8, 4, 2; OGI 168, 46 [115 B.C.] τὰ γεγονότα ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς φιλάνθρωπα; UPZ III, 3, 7 [116 B.C.]; PTebt 786, 14 [II B.C.]; Wsd 9:2; Jos., Ant. 8, 111; 347; Just., D. 35, 8 τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ [Jesus] καὶ νῦν γινομένων δυνάμεων) Lk 9:7 v.l.; 13:17; 23:8; Eph 5:12. Of commands, instructions be fulfilled, performed γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου thy will be done (Appian, Liby. 90 §423 τὸ πρόσταγμα δεῖ γενέσθαι; Syntipas p. 25, 3 γενέσθω τὸ αἴτημα) Mt 6:10; 26:42; Lk 11:2; cp. 22:42. γέγονεν ὸ̔ ἐπέταξας your order has been carried out 14:22. γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐτῶν that their demand should be granted 23:24. Of institutions: be established, the Sabbath for the sake of humans Mk 2:27 (Crates, Ep. 24 οὐ γεγόνασιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι τ. ἵππων χάριν, ἀλλʼ οἱ ἵπποι τ. ἀνθρώπων).
    ⓑ w. mention of the special nature of an undertaking: ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί in order to have such action taken in my case 1 Cor 9:15. ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ τί γένηται; what will be done when it (the wood) is dry? Lk 23:31.
    ③ come into being as an event or phenomenon from a point of origin, arise, come about, develop (Alcaeus 23 Diehl2 [320 L-P.] καί κʼ οὐδὲν ἐκ δένος γένοιτο=nothing could originate from nothing; Ath. 4:2 τὸ ὸ̓ν οὐ γίνεται ἀλλὰ τὸ μὴ ὸ̓ν)
    ⓐ of events or phenomena in nature (Sir 40:10; Ex 10:22; Job 40:23; Jos., Ant. 9, 36): lightning, thunder (X., An. 3, 1, 11) J 12:29; Rv 8:5; 11:19; calm (on the sea) Mt 8:26; Mk 4:39; Lk 8:24; storm Mk 4:37; a cloud (cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 36) 9:7; Lk 9:34; Hv 4, 3, 7; flood Lk 6:48; earthquake (Parian Marbles [III B.C.]=FGrH: 239B, 24) Mt 8:24; 28:2; Ac 16:26; Rv 6:12; 11:13; 16:18; darkness Mt 27:45; Mk 15:33; Lk 23:44; J 6:17; hail, fire Rv 8:7. Of a dawning day ὅτε δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο (cp. περὶ ἀρχομένην ἡμέραν ‘about dawn’ Jos., Vi 15: in a related story of shipwreck) Ac 27:39.
    ⓑ of other occurrences (Arrian, Anab. 4, 4, 3 τὰ ἱερὰ οὐκ ἐγίγνετο=the sacrifice did not turn out [favorably]; 1 Macc 1:25; 4:58; 9:27; 13:44; Jdth 7:29; 14:19 al.): complaining Ac 6:1; persecution, oppression Mt 13:21; 24:21; Mk 4:17; 13:19; Ac 11:19; discussion J 3:25; Ac 15:7; tumult Mt 26:5; 27:24; GJs 21:1 and 25:1; a sound Ac 2:2, 6; weeping 20:37; clamor 23:9; Mt 25:6; AcPl Ha 4, 6; famine Lk 4:25; 15:14; Ac 11:28; ὁρμή (q.v.) 14:5; war Rv 12:7; sharp contention Ac 15:39; tear (in a garment) Mt 9:16; Mk 2:21; Lk 6:49; silence (s. σιγή) Ac 21:40; Rv 8:1; στάσις (q.v. 2) Lk 23:19; Ac 15:2; 23:7, 10; concourse 21:30; confusion 19:23; shout, loud voice 2:6; 19:34; Rv 11:15; dispute Lk 22:24; envy, strife 1 Ti 6:4; astonishment AcPl Ha 4, 25; joy 6, 3; prayer 6, 7; offering 6, 37.
    ⓒ of the various divisions of a day (Jdth 13:1; 1 Macc 5:30; 4 Macc 3:8 al.) γενομένης ἡμέρας when day came (Jos., Ant. 10, 202, Vi. 405) Lk 4:42; Ac 12:18; 16:35; 23:12; cp. Lk 6:13; 22:66; Ac 27:29, 33, 39. Difft. Mk 6:21 γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου when a convenient/opportune day arrived. ὀψέ (cp. Gen 29:25; 1 Km 25:37) 11:19. ὀψίας γενομένης Mt 8:16; 14:15, 23; 16:2; 26:20; 27:57; Mk 1:32; 6:47; 14:17; 15:42; cp. J 6:16. πρωί̈ας Mt 27:1; J 21:4. νύξ Ac 27:27. ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης when it had grown late Mk 6:35; cp. 15:33; Lk 22:14; Ac 26:4.
    ④ to occur as process or result, happen, turn out, take place (Dicaearch., Fgm. 102 W.: a campaign ‘takes place’; Diod S 32 Fgm. 9c τὰς εἰς τ. πατέρα γεγενημένας ἁμαρτίας=the misdeeds ‘perpetrated’ against his father; 2 Macc 1:32; 13:17; 3 Macc 1:11; 4:12; 5:17 al.)
    ⓐ gener. τοῦτο ὅλον γέγονεν all this took place w. ἵνα foll. Mt 1:22; 26:56. ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται until all has taken place (=is past) 5:18. πάντα τὰ γενόμενα everything that had happened (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 121 §508 τὰ γενόμενα; 1 Esdr 1:10; Jdth 15:1; 1 Macc 4:20; 2 Macc 10:21; 3 Macc 1:17) 18:31; cp. 21:21; 24:6, 20, 34; 26:54; 27:54; 28:11; Mk 5:14. ἴδωμεν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο τὸ γεγονός let us see this thing that has taken place Lk 2:15 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 15 [Stone p. 40]) θανάτου γενομένου since a death has occurred, i.e. since he has died Hb 9:15. τούτου γενομένου after this had happened (Jos., Ant. 9, 56; 129) Ac 28:9. τὸ γεγονός what had happened (Diod S 12, 49, 4; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 18 §496; Jos., Ant. 14, 292) Lk 8:34; 24:12. τὰ γεγονότα AcPl Ha 11, 1.—μὴ γένοιτο strong negation, in Paul only after rhet. questions (cp. TestJob 38:1; JosAs 25:8; Epict., index p. 540e; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 1, 2, Dial. Meretr. 13, 4; Achilles Tat. 5, 18, 4; Aristaen., Ep. 1, 27) by no means, far from it, God forbid (Goodsp., Probs., 88; AMalherbe, HTR 73, ’80, 231–41) Lk 20:16; Ro 3:4, 6, 31; 6:2, 15; 7:7, 13; 9:14; 11:1, 11; 1 Cor 6:15; Gal 2:17; 3:21. In more extensive phrasing (the LXX has exx. only of this usage: Gen 44:17; 3 Km 20:3 al.; cp. Josh 22:29; Demosth. 10, 27; Alciphron 2, 5, 3 al.; Ael. Aristid. 23, 80 K.=42 p. 795 D.; 30 p. 578 D.; 54 p. 679 ὸ̔ μὴ γένοιτο) Gal 6:14; w. ἵνα foll. AcPl Ha 7, 40. τί γέγονεν ὅτι (cp. Eccl 7:10) why is it that J 14:22.—Of festivals: be held, take place, come (X., Hell. 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια; 4, 5, 1; 4 Km 23:22f; 2 Macc 6:7) feast of dedication J 10:22; passover Mt 26:2; sabbath Mk 6:2; wedding J 2:1.—Abs. impv. (put twice for emphasis as Lucian, Pisc. 1 βάλλε, βάλλε; Philostrat., Ep. 35, 1 λάβε λάβε; Procop. Soph., Ep. 45) γενηθήτω γενηθήτω so let it be as a closing formula 1 Cor 16:24 v.l. (cp. Herodas 4, 85, where the sacristan closes his prayer to Asclepius with the words: ὧδε ταῦτʼ εἴη=so may it be).—On γένοιτο ἀμήν GJs 6:2 s. ἀμήν 1a.
    ⓑ w. dat. of pers. affected
    α. w. inf. foll. (UPZ 24, 29 al.; 1 Macc 13:5; Jos., Ant. 6, 232) ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι so that he would not have to lose time Ac 20:16.
    β. w. adv. or adv. phrase added (1 Esdr 6:33) κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν according to your faith let it be done to you, i.e. you believe, and you won’t be disappointed Mt 9:29; cp. 8:13. γένοιτό μοι κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου may that happen to me as you have said Lk 1:38. πῶς ἐγένετο τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ what had happened to the possessed man Mk 5:16. ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται that it may be well w. you Eph 6:3 (Dt 5:16; cp. Epict. 2, 5, 29 εὖ σοι γένοιτο; Aelian, VH 9, 36). γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done for you as you desire, i.e. your wish is granted Mt 15:28.
    γ. w. nom. of thing (1 Macc 4:25; Sir 51:17; Ar. 15:5) γίνεταί τινί τι someth. happens to or befalls a person Mk 9:21. ἵνα μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι γένηται lest someth. worse come upon you J 5:14. τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ what has happened to him Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1, 23; AcPl Ha 5, 20). τὸ γεγενημένον αὐτῷ Ac 3:10 D. ἐγίνετο πάσῃ ψυχῄ φόβος fear came upon everyone (cp. Tob 11:18) 2:43. λύπη AcPl Ha 6, 16. Freq. γέγονε ἐμοί τι someth. has come to me= I have someth.: πώρωσις τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν a hardening (of heart) has befallen Israel Ro 11:25; σωτηρία τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γεγένηται GJs 19:2; cp. Lk 19:9; διὰ τὴν ὀπτασίαν τὴν γενομένην Παύλῳ AcPl Ha 3, 15; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ ἑκατὸν πρόβατα if a man has a hundred sheep Mt 18:12. τοῖς ἔξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται those outside receive everything in parables Mk 4:11. μήποτε γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι that you may receive no repayment Lk 14:12; cp. 19:9; J 15:7; 1 Cor 4:5.
    ⓒ w. gen. of pers. (Diod S 16, 64, 2 τὸν τῆς Ἑλένης γεγενημένον ὅρμον=the necklace that had belonged to Helen): ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κόσμου τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν the kingdom of the world has come into the possession of our Lord Rv 11:15.
    ⓓ γίνεταί τι ἐπί τινι someth. happens in the case of or to a person Mk 5:33 v.l.; ἐν v.l. This can also be expressed w. εἴς τινα Ac 28:6 or the double nom. τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο what had become of Peter 12:18 (cp. Jos., Vi. 296 οἱ εἴκοσι χρυσοῖ τὶ γεγόνασιν).
    ⓔ w. inf. foll., to emphasize the actual occurrence of the action denoted by the verb: ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτό if it comes about that he finds it= if he actually finds it Mt 18:13 (s. PCatt V, 19f [=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 V] ἐὰν γένηταί με ἀποδημεῖν; PAmh 135, 10; BGU 970, 5). ἐγένετο αὐτὸν παραπορεύεσθαι he happened to be passing Mk 2:23; cp. Lk 6:1, 6. ἐγένετο ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν just then the heaven opened Lk 3:21; cp. 16:22 (ἐν τῷ ἀποθανεῖν P75); Ac 4:5; 9:3, 32, 37, 43; 11:26; 14:1; 16:16; 19:1; 21:1, 5; 22:6, 17; 27:44; 28:8 (UPZ 62, 29 [161 B.C.] γίνεται γὰρ ἐντραπῆναι).
    ⓕ καὶ ἐγένετο (ἐγένετο δέ) periphrastic like וַיְהִי with וַ foll. to indicate the progress of the narrative; it is followed either by a conjunction like ὅτε, ὡς etc., or a gen. abs., or a prepositional constr., and joined to it is a finite verb w. καί (Jdth 5:22; 10:1; Sus 19 Theod.; 1 Macc 1:1; 5:1; Gen 39:7, 13, 19; 42:35; JosAs 11:1; 22:1; AscIs 3:2) Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15 v.l.; Lk 2:15; 5:1, 12, 17; 8:1, 22; 14:1.—Without the second καί (Jdth 2:4; 12:10; 13:12; 1 Macc 6:8; 7:2 v.l.; 9:23; Sus 28 Theod.; Bel 18 Theod.; TestAbr B 1 p. 105, 1 [Stone p. 58] and 6 p. 109, 27 [Stone p. 66]; TestJob 31:1; JosAs 1:1; 3:1) Mt 7:28; 11:1; 13:53; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 1:9; 4:4; Lk 1:8, 23, 41, 59; 2:1, 6, 46; 6:12 al. At times it is followed by an inf. The phrase is usually omitted in translation; older versions transl. it came to pass.—Mlt. 16f; MJohannessohn, Das bibl. καὶ ἐγένετο u. s. Geschichte: ZVS 53, 1926, 161–212 (LXX); s. MDibelius, Gnomon 3, 1927, 446–50; HPernot, Études sur la langue des Évangiles 1927, 189–99; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 29–62; JReiling, BT 16, ’65, 153–63; EDelebecque, Études grecques sur l’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65.
    ⑤ to experience a change in nature and so indicate entry into a new condition, become someth.
    ⓐ w. nouns (Lamellae Aur. Orphicae ed. AOlivieri 1915, p. 16, 5 θεὸς ἐγένου ἐξ ἀνθρώπου [IV/III]; Arrian, Anab. 5, 26, 5; Sir 51:2; 1 Esdr 4:26; Wsd 8:2; 4 Macc 16:6; En 103:11; Tat. 19, 2 τοῦ θανάτου καταφρονηταὶ γίνεσθε): ὅπως γένησθε υἱοὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν that you may become sons of your father Mt 5:45; ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων I will turn you into fishers of people Mk 1:17; a traitor Lk 6:16; friends 23:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 121); children of God J 1:12; children of light 12:36; a Christian Ac 26:29; apostle AcPlCor 2:4; a father Ro 4:18; a fool 1 Cor 3:18; a spectacle 4:9; a man, an adult 13:11 (Tob 1:9); a curse Gal 3:13. οὐχ ἑαυτὸν ἐδόξασεν γενηθῆναι ἀρχιερέα he did not exalt himself to be made high priest Hb 5:5; ἐγένετο ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ Σαμουήλ Samuel became (high priest) in his place GJs 10:2. W. double nom. (Ps.-Apollod., Epit. 3, 15 δράκων λίθος ἐγένετο; Quint. Smyrn. 12, 507; Bel 28; 4 Macc 18:7) οἱ λίθοι ἄρτοι γίνονται the stones turn into loaves Mt 4:3. τὸ αἵμα αὐτοῦ λίθον γεγενημένον GJs 24:3. ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (the reverse PBerl 13044, col. III, 28ff [UWilcken, SBBerlAk 1923, 161f] τί ποιῶν ἄν τις γένοιτο θεός;). τὸ ὕδωρ γενήσεται πηγή 4:14. ἡ περιτομὴ ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν Ro 2:25. ἐγενόμην ἐγὼ διάκονος I became a courier Col 1:23 (cp. Herodian 2, 6, 8 ἀνὴρ ἔπαρχος γενόμενος).—Also γ. εἴς τι (Menand., Peric. 49f Kö. [169f S.] τὸ κακὸν εἰς ἀγαθὸν ῥέπει γινόμενον; 1 Km 4:9; Jdth 5:18; 1 Macc 2:11, 43; 3:58; En 19:2 al.; B-D-F §145, 1): ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον it became a tree Lk 13:19; εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; Ac 4:11; 1 Pt 2:7 (all in ref. to Ps 117:22); εἰς χαρὰν γ. change (or, turn) into joy J 16:20. εἰς οὐδέν come to nothing Ac 5:36. εἰς παγίδα Ro 11:9 (Ps 68:23); εἰς κενὸν γ. be done in vain 1 Th 3:5. εἰς ἄψινθον Rv 8:11. Cp. AcPl Ha 6, 6. Also w. γίνεσθαι omitted: εἰς κατάκριμα (sc. ἐγένετο τὸ κρίμα) Ro 5:18.
    ⓑ used w. an adj. to paraphrase the passive (Jdth 11:11; 1 Esdr 7:3; 2 Macc 3:34; Sus 64 Theod.; En 103:9; Ath. 37, 1 πάντων ὑποχειρίων γιγνομένων): ἁπαλὸν γ. become tender Mt 24:32; Mk 13:28; ἀπειθῆ γ. Ac 26:19; ἀποσυνάγωγον γ. be expelled fr. the synagogue J 12:42; ἄφαντον γ. disappear Lk 24:31; σκωληκόβρωτον γ. be eaten by worms Ac 12:23; γνωστόν, φανερὸν γ. become known (Just., A I, 63, 6) Mk 6:14; Ac 1:19; 9:42; 19:17; 1 Cor 3:13; 14:25; Phil 1:13; δόκιμον γ. pass the test Js 1:12; ἑδραῖον γ. 1 Cor 15:58; ἔκδηλον γ. 2 Ti 3:9; AcPlCor 1:16; ἔξυπνον γ. Ac 16:27 (1 Esdr 3:3=Jos., Ant. 11:34); s. ἀπόπληκτος, ἐλεύθερος, ἐμφανής, ἔμφοβος, ἐνεργής, ἔντρομος, καθαρός, μέγας, περιδάκρυτος, περικρατής, πλήρης, πρηνής, τυφλός, ὑγιής, ὑπήκοος, ὑπόδικος, φανερός 1.
    ⓒ w. ἐν of a state of being (Stoic. III 221, 16; Diod S 20, 62, 4 ἐν ἀνέσει γ.; Plut., Tit. Flam. 378 [16, 1] ἐν ὀργῇ γ.; Lucian, Tim. 28; PPetr II, 20; III, 12 [252 B.C.] ἐν ἐπισχέσει γ.; BGU 5 II, 19 ἐν νόσῳ; POxy 471 IV, 77f; 4 Km 9:20; 1 Macc 1:27 v.l.; Sus 8 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 320, Ant. 16, 372; Mel., P. 18 ἐν πόνοις … ἐν πληγαῖς etc.) ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ Lk 22:44. ἐν ἐκστάσει Ac 22:17. ἐν πνεύματι under the Spirit’s influence Rv 1:10; 4:2; AcPl Ha 6, 28. ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων be like human beings Phil 2:7. ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, φόβῳ, τρόμῳ 1 Cor 2:3. ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:7. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γ. come to one’s senses (Soph., Phil. 950; X., An. 1, 5, 17; Polyb. 1, 49, 8; Chariton 3, 9, 11) Ac 12:11; γ. ἐν Χριστῷ be a Christian Ro 16:7. Cp. 7 below.
    ⑥ to make a change of location in space, move
    ⓐ εἴς τι (Hdt. 5, 87 al.; Philo, Op. M. 86; 2 Macc 1:13; also ἐν: Just., A II, 9, 3 ἐγενόμεθα ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ τόπω): εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα γ. (Jos., Ant. 10, 42) Ac 20:16; 21:17; 25:15. εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν Hv 3, 1, 4. Of a voice: ἐγένετο εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου reached my ear Lk 1:44. Fig. (cp. Bar 4:28) of Abraham’s blessing εἰς τὰ ἔθνη come to the Gentiles Gal 3:14; cp. 2 Cor 8:14 (s. περίσσευμα 1, ὑστέρημα 1).
    ⓑ ἔκ τινος (Job 28:2): γ. ἐκ μέσου be removed, Lat. e medio tolli (cp. Ps.-Aeschin., Ep. 12, 6 ἐκ μέσου γενομένων ἐκείνων; Plut., Timol. 238 [5, 3]; Achilles Tat. 2, 27, 2) 2 Th 2:7 (HFulford, ET 23, 1912, 40f: ‘leave the scene’). Of a voice fr. heaven: ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν γ. sound forth fr. heaven (2 Macc 2:21; cp. Da 4:31 Theod.) Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; 9:35; cp. vs. 36.
    ⓒ ἐπί τι: ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον go to the tomb Lk 24:22; ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς when he was at the steps Ac 21:35. Of fear that befalls someone (2 Macc 12:22) Lk 1:65; 4:36; Ac 5:5. Of ulcers: break out on someone Rv 16:2 (Ex 9:10f). Of divine commands: go out to someone Lk 3:2. ἐπί is somet. used w. the gen. (Appian, Liby. 93 §440; Alex. Aphr., Mixt. II 2 p. 213, 21) instead of the acc.: γενόμενος ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου when he had arrived at the place 22:40 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 327, 18 ἐπὶ τ. τόπων γινόμενος).—J 6:21.
    ⓓ w. κατά and gen. of place: τὸ γενόμενον ῥῆμα καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας the message that has spread throughout all Judea Ac 10:37. W. acc. of place (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 15; Apollon. Paradox. 3 κατὰ τόπους γ.; Jos., Ant. I, 174; cp. 2 Macc 9:8): γενόμενος κατὰ τὸν τόπον Lk 10:32; γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον Ac 27:7.
    ⓔ w. πρός and acc. of the direction and goal (PLond III, 962, 1 p. 210 [III A.D.] γενοῦ πρὸς Ἄταϊν τὸν ποιμένα; PFlor 180, 45) 1 Cor 2:3; 2J 12. Of divine instructions be given to someone (Gen 15:1, 4; Jer 1:2, 11; 13:8; Ezk 6:1; Hos 1:1; cp. ἐπί w. acc.) J 10:35; Ac 7:31 v.l.; 10:13; 13:32.
    ⓕ w. σύν and the dat. join someone (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 8; 2 Macc 13:13) Lk 2:13.
    ⓖ w. ἐγγύς (X., An. 1, 8, 8, Cyr. 7, 1, 7; cp. γίν. πλησίον Philo, Mos. 1, 228; Jos., Ant. 4, 40): ἐγγὺς τοῦ πλοίου γίνεσθαι come close to the boat J 6:19. Fig. of the relation of believers to Christ: come near Eph 2:13.
    ⓗ w. ὧδε come here J 6:25;
    ⓘ ἔμπροσθέν τινος γ. J 1:15, 30 s. on ἔμπροσθεν 1bζ and ὀπίσω 2b.
    ⑦ to come into a certain state or possess certain characteristics, to be, prove to be, turn out to be (on relation to the forms of εἰμί [here and in 8–10] s. ALink, StKr 69, 1896, 420ff). Used w. the nom. (Wsd 16:3; Jdth 16:21; Sir 31:22; 1 Macc 3:58) γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι be prudent Mt 10:16. ἄκαρπος γίνεται 13:22; Mk 4:19.—W. other words: vs. 22; 9:50; Lk 1:2; 2:2; 6:36 and very oft. Freq. the dat. of advantage (dat. commodi) is added (1 Macc 10:47; 2 Macc 7:37; 4 Macc 6:28; 12:17): ἀγαπητόν τινι γ. be dear to someone 1 Th 2:8. ἀπρόσκοπον γ. τινι be inoffensive to someone 1 Cor 10:32; γ. τινι μαθητήν J 15:8; μισθαποδότην γ. τινι be a rewarder of someone Hb 11:6; γ. ὁδηγόν τινι Ac 1:16. Cp. παρηγορία, σημεῖον, τύπος.—γ. ὁμοθυμαδόν come together in unanimity or reach unanimity Ac 15:25.—τὶ γίνεταί τινί τι a thing results in someth. for someone τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγ. θάνατος; Ro 7:13. ἡ ἐξουσία πρόσκομμα τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 Cor 8:9.—γίνομαι ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὡσεί τις (Ps 21:15; 31:9; 37:15; 82:11; 87:5 al.) be, become, show oneself like Mt 6:16; 10:25; 18:3; 28:4; Lk 22:26, 44; 1 Cor 4:13; 9:20f; Gal 4:12. καθὼς ἐγένετο … οὕτως ἔσται as it was … so it will be Lk 17:26, 28. οὐ χρὴ ταῦτα οὕτως γίνεσθαι this should not be so Js 3:10. ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως καὶ ἀμέμπτως ὑμῖν ἐγενήθημεν we proved/showed ourselves … toward you 1 Th 2:10.—In statements pert. to age (Aristoxenus, Fgm. 16 γεγονότα [sc. τὸν Πυθαγόραν] ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα; Demetr. of Phaleron [IV–III B.C.], Fgm. 153 Wehrli [’49]; Demetr: 722 Fgm. 1, 1 Jac.; Jos., Ant. 10, 50) ἐτῶν δώδεκα Lk 2:42; cp. 1 Ti 5:9.—Here prob. also belongs ἐγένετο γνώμης he decided Ac 20:3 (cp. Plut., Phoc. 752 [23, 4] ἐλπίδος μεγάλης γ.; Cass. Dio 61, 14 τ. ἐπιθυμίας γ.; Jos., Bell. 6, 287).
    ⑧ to be present at a given time, be there ([Ps.-]Jos., Ant. 18, 63) Mk 1:4; J 1:6, hence exist (Diod S 3, 52, 4 γέγονε γένη γυναικῶν=there have been nations of women; Appian, Maced. 18 §3 τὸ χρυσίον τὸ γιγνόμενον=the gold that was at hand; Bar 3:26; 2 Macc 10:24) Ro 11:5; 1J 2:18. ἐγένετο there lived Lk 1:5. ἔν τινι 2 Pt 2:1. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς Rv 16:18 (Da 12:1 Theod.).
    ⑨ to be closely related to someone or someth., belong to
    ⓐ gen. of the possessor (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 79 §336 a slave γεγένητο Πομπηίου=had belonged to Pompey: B-D-F §162, 7) belong to someone Lk 20:14, 33 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 83 §350 γυνὴ Κράσσου γεγενημένη=who had been the wife of [the younger] Crassus).
    ⓑ w. dat. of pers. belong to someone (PPetr II, 40b, 7 [277 B.C.]; O. Wilck II, 1530, 2f [120 B.C.] τὸ γινόμενόν μοι=what belongs to me) of a woman ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ Ro 7:3f (cp. Ruth 1:12f; Dt 24:2).
    ⓒ w. prep. μετά τινος (Josh 2:19) Ac 9:19; 20:18. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his intimate friends Mk 16:10. πρός τινα be w. someone 1 Cor 16:10 ( make him [Timothy] feel quite at home with you Mft.) ὑπό τινα be under the authority of someone or someth. (1 Macc 10:38) Gal 4:4.
    ⓓ Here perh. belongs ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται it is not a matter of private interpretation 2 Pt 1:20.
    ⑩ to be in or at a place, be in, be there
    ⓐ ἔν τινι to designate one’s present or future place of residence (X., An. 4, 3, 29; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 4 §15 Ἀντώνιος ἐν Ἐφέσῳ γενόμενος; Aelian, VH 4, 15; Herodian 2, 2, 5; POxy 283, 11; 709, 6 ἐν Μένφει γενόμενος; PTebt 416, 3; BGU 731 II, 6 ἐν οἰκίᾳ μου; Num 11:35; Judg 17:4; 1 Ch 14:17; Jdth 5:7 al. Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 18 Jac.) Mt 26:6; Mk 9:33; Ac 7:38; 13:5; 2 Ti 1:17; Rv 1:9; AcPl Ha 7, 23.
    ⓑ w. adv.: ἐκεῖ (X., An. 6, 5, 20; 3 Km 8:8 v.l.; Jos., Ant. 10, 180) Ac 19:21. κατὰ μόνας Mk 4:10.—B. 637. DELG s.v. γίγνομαι. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γίνομαι

  • 18 ἐν

    ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.
    ① marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)
    ⓐ of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.
    ⓑ on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.
    ⓒ within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.2] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.
    ⓓ among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.
    ⓔ before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).
    ⓕ esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.
    ② marker of a state or condition, in
    ⓐ of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.
    ⓑ of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.
    ③ marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.
    ④ marker of close association within a limit, in
    ⓐ fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.
    ⓑ of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.
    ⓒ esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls2 ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls2 ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.
    ⑤ marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).
    ⓐ it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’
    α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).
    β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.
    ⓑ it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl2). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).
    ⑥ marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG2 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).
    ⑦ marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.
    ⑧ marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.
    ⑨ marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)
    ⓐ gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.
    ⓑ w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.
    ⑩ marker of a period of time, in, while, when
    ⓐ indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.
    ⓑ point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.
    ⓒ to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.
    ⑪ marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.
    ⑫ marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐν

  • 19 στείβω

    Grammatical information: v.
    Meaning: `to tread (on something), to densify by treading, to trod, to trample' (ep. poet. since Λ 534 a. Υ 499).
    Other forms: only presentst. except aor. κατ-έστειψας (S. OC 467; not quite certain), vbaladj. στιπτός (v. l. - ει-) `trodden solid, solid, hard'(S., Ar.), ἄ- στείβω `untrodden' (S.; also OGI 606?).
    Compounds: Rarely w. prefix, e.g. ἐπι-, κατα-.
    Derivatives: στοιβή f. `stuffing, cushion, bulge etc.'; often as plantname `Poterium spinosum', of which the leaves were used to fill up (Hp., Ar., Arist., Epid. [IVa] etc.), with στοιβ-ίον `id.' (Dawkins JournofHellStud. 56, 10), - άς = στιβάς, - ηδόν `crammed in' (Arist.-comm.), - άζω, rarely w. δια- a.o., `to fill, to stuff' (Hdt., LXX a.o.), from which - αστός, - αστής, - ασις, - άσιμος, - ασία (hell. a. late). -- Besides zero grade nouns: A. στίβος m. `(trodden) road, path, footstep, trail' (ep. Ion. poet. since h. Merc.; cf. Porzig Satzinhalte 318), `fuller's workshop' (pap. IIIa). From this 1. στιβάς, - άδος f. `bed of straw, reed or leaves, mattress, bed, grave' (IA.) with - άδιον n. `id'. (hell. a. late), - αδεύω `to use like straw' (Dsc.). 2. στιβεύς m. `hound' (Opp.), `fuller' (pap.), = ὁδευτής (H.), - εύω `to track' (D. S., Plu., H.), = πορεύεσθαι (H.) with - εία f. `the tracking etc.' (D. S. a.o.), - εῖον n. `fuller's workshop' (pap.), - ευτής m. `hound' (Sostrat. ap. Stob.); also - ίη = - εία (Opp.; metr. cond.). 3. στιβική f. `fuller's tax' (pap. IIIa). 4. στιβάζω `to enter, to track etc.' with - ασις f. (late). 5. ἐστίβηται `has been tracked' perf. pass. (S. Aj. 874; στιβέω or - άω?). 6. ἄ-στιβ-ος `unentered' (AP), usu. - ής `id.' (A., S., also X. a.o.; joined to the εσ-stems and connected with the verb), - ητος `id.' (Lyc. a.o.; cf. ἐστίβηται). 7. Στίβων name of a dog (X. Cyn.). -- B. στιβαρός `solid, compact, massive, strong' (ep. poet. Il., also hell. a. late prose); like βριαρός a.o.; Chantraine Form. 227, also Benveniste Origines 19; cf. also Treu Von Homer zur Lyrik 49, - αρηδόν adv. `compact' (opposite σποράδην; late). -- C. With long vowel στί̄βη f. `ripe' (Od., Call.), - ήεις (Call.); on the meaning cf. πάγος, πάχνη to πήγνυμι.
    Origin: IE [Indo-European] [1015] * steib- `(become) stiff, fixed
    Etymology: From the Greek material the essential meaning appears to be the idea `tread (with the feet), make solid, fill up, press together' ( στοιβή, στιβάς, στι-βαρός), from where `tread' with `path, trace, track' ( στείβω, στίβος, στιβεύω). -- Exact agreements outside Greek for στείβω and related στίβος, στιβαρός are missing. Nearest comes Arm. stēp, gen. -oy `frequent, incessant, permanent' (adj. and adv.; on the meaning cf. πυκνός) with stip-em `press, urge', -aw, -ov `quick, diligent(ly)' from IE * stoibo- or * steibo-; so an exampel of the very rare IE b? Beside it with p the Lat. secondary formation stīpāre `press to gether, press, heap, fill up'; here also the Corinth. PN Στίπων (IG 4, 319)? -- To this can be connected in diff. languages on the one hand expressions for `fixed, stiff etc.': Germ., e.g. OE, MHG stīf `stiff, straight', Balt., e.g. Lith. stimpù, stìpti `become stiff or frozen', stiprùs `strong, steady'; on the other hand words for `bar, stalk, post etc.' in Lat. stīpes `pole, stem, bar', stipula `straw' and, with b (IE b as in στείβω), Lith., e.g. stíebas `mast(tree), pillar, stalk etc.', Slav., e.g. Russ. stébelь `stalk' etc. -- Further forms w. rich lit. in WP 2, 646ff., Pok. 1015f., W.-Hofmann s. stīpō, stips, stipula, Fraenkel and Vasmer s. vv. (Not hereVgl. στῖφος, στιφρός.)
    Page in Frisk: 2,781-782

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > στείβω

  • 20 Stand

    Imperf. stehen
    * * *
    der Stand
    (Marktstand) stall; stand; booth;
    (Spielstand) score;
    (Standposition) standing position;
    (Zustand) status; state;
    (fester Halt) footing; foothold
    * * *
    Stạnd [ʃtant]
    m -(e)s, -e
    ['ʃtɛndə]
    1) no pl (= das Stehen) standing position; (= Standfläche) place to stand; (für Gegenstand) stand

    ein Sprung/Start aus dem Stand — a standing jump/start

    bei jdm or gegen jdn/bei etw einen schweren Stand haben (fig) — to have a hard time with sb/in sth

    2) (= Marktstand etc) stand; (= Taxistand) stand, rank
    3) no pl (= Lage) state; (= Niveau, FIN = Kurs) level; (= Zählerstand, Thermometerstand, Barometerstand etc) reading, level; (= Kassenstand, Kontostand) balance; (von Gestirnen) position; (SPORT = Spielstand) score

    im Stand der Sklaverei/Knechtschaft — in a state of slavery/bondage

    See:
    4) (= soziale Stellung) station, status; (= Klasse) rank, class; (= Beruf, Gewerbe) profession; (= Reichsstand) estate

    die niederen/vornehmen or höheren Stände (old) — the lower/upper classes

    * * *
    der
    1) (the part of a street etc where a street-seller or entertainer works: He has a pitch on the High Street.) pitch
    2) (a small shop or a counter or table on which goods are displayed for sale: He bought a newspaper at the bookstall on the station; traders' stalls.) stall
    3) (a stall where goods are displayed for sale or advertisement.) stand
    4) (rank or reputation: a diplomat of high standing.) stand
    * * *
    <-[e]s, Stände>
    [ʃtant, pl ˈʃtɛndə]
    m
    1. (das Stehen) standing [position]
    keinen festen/sicheren \Stand auf der Leiter haben to not have a firm/safe [or secure] foothold on the ladder
    aus dem \Stand from a standing position [or start]
    den Motor im \Stand laufen lassen to let the engine idle
    2. (Verkaufsstand) stand; (Messestand a.) booth; (Marktstand a.) stall BRIT; (Taxenstand) rank
    3. (Anzeige) reading
    laut \Stand des Barometers according to the barometer [reading]
    4. kein pl (Zustand) state, status
    der \Stand der Forschung the level of research
    der neueste \Stand der Forschung/Technik state of the art
    der \Stand der Dinge the [present] state of things [or affairs]
    beim gegenwärtigen \Stand der Dinge at the present state of affairs, the way things stand [or are] at the moment
    sich akk auf dem neuesten \Stand befinden to be up-to-date
    etw auf den neuesten \Stand bringen to bring sth up-to-date
    5. BÖRSE, ÖKON (Kurs) rate, quotation
    \Stand der Aktiva und Passiva statement of assets and liabilities
    6. (Spielstand) score
    7. SCHWEIZ (Kanton) canton
    8. (Gesellschaftsschicht) station, status; (Klasse) class, rank
    der geistliche \Stand the clergy
    9.
    ▶ aus dem \Stand [heraus] off the cuff
    ▶ der dritte \Stand the third estate
    ▶ in den \Stand der Ehe treten (geh) to be joined in matrimony form
    ▶ einen/keinen festen \Stand unter den Füßen haben to be settled/unsettled
    ▶ [bei jdm] einen schweren [o keinen leichten] \Stand haben to have a hard time of it [with sb]
    ▶ aus dem \Stand verreisen to go away on an impromptu journey
    * * *
    der; Stand[e]s, Stände
    1) o. Pl. (das Stehen) standing position

    ein Sprung/Start aus dem Stand — a standing jump/start

    [bei jemandem od. gegen jemanden] einen schweren Stand haben — (fig.) have a tough time [of it] [with somebody]

    etwas aus dem Stand [heraus] beantworten — (ugs.) answer something off the top of one's head (coll.)

    2) (Standort) position
    3) (VerkaufsStand; Box für ein Pferd) stall; (MesseStand, InformationsStand) stand; (ZeitungsStand) [newspaper] kiosk
    4) o. Pl. (erreichte Stufe; Zustand) state

    etwas auf den neu[e]sten Stand bringen — bring something up to date or update something

    außer Stand[e] — s. außerstande

    im Stand[e] — s. imstande

    5) (des Wassers, Flusses) level; (des Thermometers, Zählers, Barometers) reading; (der Kasse, Finanzen) state; (eines Himmelskörpers) position
    6) o. Pl. (FamilienStand) status
    7) (Gesellschaftsschicht) class; (BerufsStand) trade; (Ärzte, Rechtsanwälte) [professional] group
    * * *
    Stand m; -(e)s, Stände
    1. nur sg; (aufrechtes Stehen) standing position; (Halt) footing, foothold;
    aus dem Stand from a standing position; fig (ohne zu überlegen) off the top of one’s head umg;
    Sprung/Start aus dem Stand standing jump/start;
    im Stand when standing still; AUTO while stationary; Turnen:
    nach dem Abgang (vom Reck) im sicheren Stand landen make a secure landing from the horizontal bar;
    keinen (festen) Stand haben Person: have no firm foothold;
    einen schweren Stand haben fig be in a difficult position;
    bei jemandem einen schweren Stand haben have a hard time of it with sb
    2. nur sg; (Zustand) state; (Beschaffenheit) condition; (Lage) situation, position; (Niveau) level, standard; eines Wettkampfes: score;
    der Stand der Dinge the present state of affairs, the way things are;
    nach dem (jetzigen) Stand der Dinge as matters stand (at the moment);
    der neueste Stand (der Technik) the latest developments pl (in technology);
    auf dem neuesten Stand (der Technik) sein Gerät etc: be state-of-the-art; Patentwesen:
    der Stand der Technik the prior art;
    den höchsten Stand erreichen reach its ( oder one’s) peak ( oder highest level);
    etwas auf den neuesten Stand bringen update sth, bring sth up to date;
    auf dem Stand von 1950 as it was ( oder they were) in 1950;
    Stand: Juli 2002 as at July 2002; → außerstande, imstande, instand, zustande
    3. SPORT (Spielstand) score;
    beim Stande von 2:1 with the score at 2-1
    4. (Wasserstand) level; ASTRON position; WIRTSCH, von Kursen, Preisen, des Marktes: level; (Kilometerstand) etwa mileage; auf dem Tacho: speedometer reading; (Zählerstand) reading; (Kontostand) balance
    5. (soziale Stellung) social status ( oder position, standing); (Klasse) class; (Rechts-, Familienstand) status; (Beruf) profession;
    die höheren Stände the upper classes;
    der dritte Stand HIST the third estate;
    die drei Stände HIST the three orders ( oder estates);
    in den (heiligen) Stand der Ehe treten enter the (holy) state of matrimony;
    unter/über seinem Stand heiraten marry below/above one’s station
    eine Pizza am Stand essen eat a pizza at a stand-up stall ( oder kiosk, US auch concession stand)
    * * *
    der; Stand[e]s, Stände
    1) o. Pl. (das Stehen) standing position

    ein Sprung/Start aus dem Stand — a standing jump/start

    [bei jemandem od. gegen jemanden] einen schweren Stand haben — (fig.) have a tough time [of it] [with somebody]

    etwas aus dem Stand [heraus] beantworten — (ugs.) answer something off the top of one's head (coll.)

    2) (Standort) position
    3) (VerkaufsStand; Box für ein Pferd) stall; (MesseStand, InformationsStand) stand; (ZeitungsStand) [newspaper] kiosk
    4) o. Pl. (erreichte Stufe; Zustand) state

    etwas auf den neu[e]sten Stand bringen — bring something up to date or update something

    außer Stand[e] — s. außerstande

    im Stand[e] — s. imstande

    5) (des Wassers, Flusses) level; (des Thermometers, Zählers, Barometers) reading; (der Kasse, Finanzen) state; (eines Himmelskörpers) position
    6) o. Pl. (FamilienStand) status
    7) (Gesellschaftsschicht) class; (BerufsStand) trade; (Ärzte, Rechtsanwälte) [professional] group
    * * *
    ¨-e m.
    booth n.
    class n.
    (§ pl.: classes)
    level n.
    profession n.
    rank n.
    social standing n.
    stall n.
    stand n.
    standing position n.
    state n.
    status n.
    (§ pl.: statuses)

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > Stand

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Bar/None Records — Infobox record label name = Bar/None Records image bg = parent = founded = 1986 founder = Tom Prendergast Glenn Morrow defunct = distributor = ADA genre = Alternative rock Indie rock Eclectic Folk country = United States location = Hoboken, New… …   Wikipedia

  • Bar-Kays — Infobox Musical artist Name = The Bar Kays Img capt = Img size = Landscape = Background = group or band Alias = Origin = Memphis, Tennessee, U.S. Genre = R B, soul, funk, Years active = 1966–1988, 1991–present Label = Stax, Volt, Mercury, Rhino,… …   Wikipedia

  • The Young and the Restless minor characters — The following are characters from the American soap opera The Young and the Restless who are notable for their actions or relationships, but who do not warrant their own articles. Contents 1 Current Characters 1.1 Genevieve …   Wikipedia

  • The Birthday Massacre — Rhim, Rainbow, Chibi, Owen, Nate Manor, Michael Falcore. Background information Origin Toronto, Ontario, Cana …   Wikipedia

  • Bar, Montenegro — Bar Бар Bar City Centre …   Wikipedia

  • BAR-ILAN, DAVID — (1930–2003), Israeli journalist and pianist. Bar Ilan was born in Haifa. A gifted pianist, he won a scholarship to Juilliard School of Fine Arts in New York at the age of 17. As a soloist he appeared with major orchestras and recorded six albums …   Encyclopedia of Judaism

  • BAR KOKHBA — (d. 135 C.E.), leader of the revolt in Judea against Rome (132–135 C.E.). The Man and the Leader Bar Kokhba is known in talmudic sources as Ben Kozevah, Bar Kozevah, or Ben Koziva (Heb. בן כוזבה, בר כוסבא, בן כוזיבא; Sanh. 93b; BK 97b; TJ, Ta an …   Encyclopedia of Judaism

  • BAR-YEHUDAH (Idelson), ISRAEL — (1895–1965), Israeli labor leader, born in Konotop, Ukraine. He studied mining engineering and joined the Ẓe irei Zion movement. After he became secretary of its left wing (Ẓiyyonim Soẓialistim) in 1921, he was arrested by the Soviet authorities… …   Encyclopedia of Judaism

  • The Chillers — are an Authentic Rock Roll band consisting of Mike Hars, Mike Brajer, and Wally Van Treek. The band, founded in 1991, is receiving rising popularity in the Delaware Valley Region.Infobox musical artist Name = The Chillers Img capt = The Chillers… …   Wikipedia

  • The Saddle Club (books) — The Saddle Club is a series of intermediate children s books published by Bantam Books between 1986 and 2001. The series was created by a publishing house using the contract writing services of self professed equestrian novice Bonnie Bryant. Many …   Wikipedia

  • The Blessed Virgin Mary —     The Blessed Virgin Mary     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Blessed Virgin Mary     The Blessed Virgin Mary is the mother of Jesus Christ, the mother of God.     In general, the theology and history of Mary the Mother of God follow the… …   Catholic encyclopedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»